Yamaha CVP98 Owner's Manual

[4.9MB] cvp96 Manual Library - Yamaha - United States

User Manual: Yamaha CVP98 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 208 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Cover
PRECAUTIONS
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready
CHAPTER 2: Help Mode and Demo Play
- Using the Help Mode
- Demo Play
CHAPTER 3: Voices
CHAPTER 4: Accompaniment Styles (Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)
CHAPTER 5: Registrations
- Registrations (Registering/Recalling Panel Setups)
CHAPTER 6: Song Control
CHAPTER 7: The Utility Functions
CHAPTER 8: Others
- The Connectors
- Connecting to a Personal Computer
Index
Table of Contents

IMPORTANT

Check Your Power Supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the

voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel.

In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the

bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power

cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the

voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V

when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use

a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the

correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-

rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in

place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap-

proximately five years. When replacement becomes neces-

sary, contact a qualified service representative to perform

the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or

incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away

from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as

regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the

servicer is required by law to return the defective parts.

However, you do have the option of having the servicer

dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged

beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid-

ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and

federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products

that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl-

edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the

unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the

manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con-

sult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi-

cates the location of the name plate. The model number,

serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on

this plate. You should record the model number, serial

number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided

below and retain this manual as a permanent record of

your purchase.

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic

products may have either labels similar to the graphics

shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these

graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph-

ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi-

cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in-

struction section.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

Model _____________________________________

Serial No.__________________________________

Purchase Date _____________________________

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.

REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

92-469-➀

The exclamation point with the equilat-

eral triangle is intended to alert the user

to the presence of important operating

and maintenance (servicing) instruc-

tions in the literature accompanying the

product.

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol within the equilateral triangle is

intended to alert the user to the pres-

ence of uninsulated “dangerous volt-

age” within the product’s enclosure that

may be of sufficient magnitude to con-

stitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products

are tested and approved by an independent safety testing

laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is

properly installed and used in its normal and customary

manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO

NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so un-

less specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perform-

ance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims

filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the

unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be

affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The

information contained in this manual is believed to be

correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves

the right to change or modify any of the specifications

without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro-

duce products that are both user safe and environmentally

friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these

goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the

law, we want you to be aware of the following:

• Take care that the key cover does not pinch your fingers, and do not insert a

finger or hand in the key cover gap.

• Never insert or drop paper or metallic or other objects between the slits of

the key cover and the keyboard. If this happens, immediately turn off the

power and remove the electric plug from the outlet and have the instrument

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not place the instrument against a wall (allow at least 3 cm/one-inch

from the wall), since this can cause inadequate air circulation, and possibly

result in the instrument overheating.

• Read carefully the attached documentation explaining the assembly pro-

cess. Failure to assemble the instrument in the proper sequence might re-

sult in damage to the instrument or even injury.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom-

fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

■USING THE BENCH (if included)

• Do not play carelessly with or stand on the bench. Using it as a tool or step-

ladder or for any other purpose might result in accident or injury.

• Only one person should sit on the bench at a time, in order to prevent the

possibility of accident or injury.

• If the bench screws become loose due to extensive long-term use, tighten

them periodically using the included tool.

■SAVING USER DATA

• Always save data to a floppy disk frequently, in order to help prevent the loss

of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modi-

fications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,

short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.

If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and

have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill

into any openings.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells or

smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the instrument

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the instrument. The required

voltage is printed on the name plate of the instrument.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the

outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators,

and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy

objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over,

or roll anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from an outlet, always hold the plug itself

and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con-

nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over-

heating in the outlet.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the instrument is not to be

used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off

the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all

components, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme

cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the

day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter-

nal components.

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions,

radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can affect

proper operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden-

tally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint thinners,

solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths. Also, do

not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument, since this might dis-

color the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and do

not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

(1)B_EL/CL

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-98/96! We recommend that you read this

manual carefully so that you can fully take advantage of the advanced and convenient functions of the

CVP-98/96. We also recommend that you keep this manual in a safe and handy place for future refer-

ence.

Included Accessories

● Music Software Collection Disk (+ Music Book)

This disk features various recorded song samples for playing on the CVP-98/96, and MIDI

driver software for computers (page 157).

● Floppy Disk

Blank disk for recording your performances.

● Owner’s Manual and Reference Manual (Assembly Instructions and Lists)

● Bench (included or optional depending on locale)

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1:

Getting Ready

Features of the CVP-98/96 4

About This Manual 5

Conventions Used in This Manual ......... 5

Handling Floppy Disks 7

Setting Up the CVP-98/96 8

Music Stand ........................................... 8

Key Cover .............................................. 8

Turning on the Power ............................. 9

Headphones ........................................... 9

Panel Controls and Terminals 10

Basic Operation 12

LCD Display and LCD Buttons ............. 12

PAGE [<] [>] Buttons.......................... 14

[EXIT] Button ........................................ 15

[DISPLAY HOLD] Button ...................... 15

Adjusting the Contrast of the LCD

Display ................................................. 15

Memory Backup ................................... 16

Display Messages ................................ 16

Adjusting the Volume 17

[MASTER VOLUME] ............................ 17

[ACMP/SONG VOLUME] ..................... 17

[MIXER] ................................................ 17

[EXP.PEDAL] ....................................... 18

Adjusting the Timbre of the Sound

[MASTER EQUALIZER] ....................... 19

Power Bass (CVP-98 only) .................. 21

CHAPTER 2:

Help Mode and Demo Play

Using the Help Mode 22

Demo Play 24

CHAPTER 3:

Voices

Selecting Voices 27

Selecting a Voice from the VOICE

SELECT Display .................................. 27

Selecting Voices from the Main Display....

Organ Combination (Organ Combi.) .... 29

Keyboard Percussion ........................... 32

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously

— Dual Mode 33

Selecting the Dual Voice ...................... 33

Setting the Volume Balance of the

Two Voices ........................................... 34

Detuning the Pitches of the Two

Voices .................................................. 35

Changing the Octave Setting of the

Two Voices ........................................... 35

Playing Two Voices from

Different Sides of the Keyboard

— Split Mode 36

Selecting the Split Voice ...................... 36

Changing the Split Point....................... 37

Setting the Volume Balance of the

Two Voices ........................................... 38

Changing the Octave Setting of the

Two Voices ........................................... 38

Using the Dual and Split Functions

Simultaneously ..................................... 39

Using the Pedals 40

Damper Pedal (Right) .......................... 40

Sostenuto Pedal (Center)..................... 40

Soft Pedal (Left) ................................... 40

Reverb 41

Reverb ON/OFF ................................... 41

Selecting the Reverb Type ................... 41

Setting the Total Depth ........................ 42

Setting the Depth for Each Part

— Reverb Part Depth ........................... 43

Voice Effects 44

Effect ON/OFF ..................................... 44

Selecting the Effect Type ..................... 45

Setting the Effect Depth ....................... 46

Restoring the Basic Settings ................ 46

CHAPTER 4:

Accompaniment Styles

(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)

Selecting Accompaniment Styles 47

Selecting a style from the STYLE

SELECT Display .................................. 47

Selecting styles from the Main Display 48

Tempo Control and Volume Adjustment ....

Starting/Stopping the Accompani-

ment Style 50

Starting the Accompaniment Style ....... 50

Break .................................................... 53

Stopping the accompaniment style ...... 53

Using the Metronome 54

Playing with the Auto Accompani-

ment 56

Types of Auto Accompaniment ............ 56

Stopping the Auto Accompaniment ...... 59

Adjusting the Overall Auto

Accompaniment Volume ...................... 60

Individual Part Volume Control ............. 60

Changing the Split Point....................... 61

Other Auto Accompaniment

Functions 62

Harmony ............................................... 62

One Touch Setting ............................... 63

Virtual Arranger .................................... 64

Synchronized Stop Function ................ 64

Small Accompaniment (SMALL ACMP) ...

Chord Assist ......................................... 66

Custom Style 68

Other Custom Style Functions ............. 74

Playing Back Your Custom Styles........ 77

Custom Style Alert & Error Displays .... 78

Style File Load 80

Loading Disk Styles .............................. 80

Using Loaded Style Files ..................... 82

CHAPTER 5:

Registrations

Registrations (Registering/

Recalling Panel Setups) 83

Recalling the Registered Panel

Settings ................................................ 84

Naming the Registration ....................... 85

Freeze Function ................................... 86

CHAPTER 6:

Song Control

Song Playback 87

Playback ............................................... 87

Part Cancel .......................................... 91

Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and

2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment ............ 92

Overall Song Playback Volume Control ..

Individual Part Volume Control ............. 94

Changing Settings in the TRACK

MIXER Display ..................................... 96

Repeat Functions ................................. 97

Other Playback Controls ...................... 99

Playing Other Types of Music Data ...... 99

Guide Control 100

Guide Methods and Piano Roll .......... 100

Using the Guide Function ................... 101

Other Guide-related Functions ........... 103

Song Recording 105

Recording Setup: Disk Format .......... 106

Quick Recording ................................. 107

Track Recording

(Multi-track Recording) ....................... 110

Adding New Tracks ............................ 113

Punch-in/out Recording ...................... 113

Chord Sequence ................................ 116

Other Chord Sequence Functions ...... 119

Record Edit Function ........................... 120

Song Name ........................................ 121

Track Edit ........................................... 122

Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data) . 124

Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT

Display ............................................... 125

Recording Without a Disk ................... 127

CHAPTER 7:

The Utility Functions

Keyboard 130

Keyboard 1 (KEYBOARD 1) Display

— PAGE 1 ............................................. 130

Keyboard 2 (KEYBOARD 2) Display

— PAGE 2 ............................................. 131

Pedal 133

Pedal (PEDAL) Display — PAGE 3 ...... 133

Disk 135

Format (FORMAT) Display —

PAGE

4 ...

135

Song Copy (SONG COPY) Display

— PAGE 5 ............................................. 136

Song Delete (SONG DELETE) Display

— PAGE 6 ............................................. 138

Registration (REGISTRATION) Display

— PAGE 7 ............................................. 139

Transform (TRANSFORM) Display

— PAGE 8 ............................................. 142

MIDI 143

MIDI 1 Display — PAGE 9 .................... 143

MIDI 2 Display — PAGE 10 .................. 144

MIDI 3 Display — PAGE 11 .................. 146

Backup 147

Backup (BACKUP) Display

— PAGE 12 ........................................... 147

Recall (RECALL) Display —

PAGE

13 ...

148

Utility 149

Micro Tuning (MICRO TUNING)

Display — PAGE 14 .............................. 149

Scale Tuning (SCALE TUNING)

Display — PAGE 15 .............................. 150

Pop-up Time (POPUP TIME) Display

— PAGE 16 ........................................... 153

Alert Sound (ALERT) Display

— PAGE 17 ........................................... 153

CHAPTER 8:

Others

The Connectors 154

Connecting to a Personal

Computer 156

Index ...................................................... 158

CHAPTER 1: Getting Ready

Features of the CVP-98/96

● Large, Easy-to-use LCD Display

The large LCD (along with the dedicated buttons) provides comprehen-

sive and easy-to-understand control of the CVP-98/96’s operations (page

12).

● Wealth of Rich, Realistic Voices

The CVP-98/96 has a wide variety of authentic and dynamic voices (133

Clavinova voices + 480 XG voices + 12 Drum Kits). These include excep-

tionally natural-sounding piano, strings and brass voices. Moreover, you

can play realistic drum and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard.

(See page 32.)

● Playback of Song Disks

The CVP-98/96 can play back various commercially available song

disks. With the appropriate disk software, you can play the piano part of the

song yourself along with playback of a full orchestra or backing band.

● Special Guide Functions for Easy Learning

With the appropriate disk software, the LCD display and guide lamps

help you learn songs by showing you when and where to play the proper

notes. The three-step system helps you to easily and quickly master each

song. (See page 100.)

● Fun, Dynamic Automatic Accompaniment

The Automatic Accompaniment of the CVP-98/96 gives you full and

exciting instrumental backing in your favorite music styles, according to the

chords you play. There are 100 accompaniment styles (page 47), plus an

additional 40 “Pianist” styles that allow you to enjoy solo piano accompani-

ment (page 57).

● Easy-to-use Recording Features

Depending on your keyboard expertise and preference, you use a variety

of different recording methods: Quick Recording, Track Recording, and

Step Recording of Automatic Accompaniment (Chord Sequence Function)

(page 105).

● Convenient TO HOST Terminals for Direct Connection

to Computers

The CVP-98/96 can be used as a high-quality sound source for playback

of music software for computers. It can also be used as a master keyboard

for inputting performance data and creating music with a computer. (See

page 156.)

About This Manual

■ Indications of Buttons and LCD Display ..................................

[ ]: This indicates actual panel buttons.

Conventions Used in This Manual

■ Indications of Operation Explanations.......................................

The arrows shown below are used in this manual in order to distin-

guish the results of the operation from the operation steps.

Operation results

♥ ➔ ♠This mark indicates that executing ♥ results in ♠.

Operation steps

♥ ➾ ♣This mark indicates that after executing ♥, then execute ♣.

Bold characters:

Items in the LCD display and the LCD buttons corresponding to these

items (directly below, or to the left or right) are indicated in bold charac-

ters in this manual. For example, the term “VOICE” shown in the LCD

display is written as VOICE. Also the LCD buttons corresponding to

“VOICE ▼ ▲” in the display are indicated as VOICE ▼ ▲ in the

manual.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

When this mark is used, words such as

button, slider, jack (terminal) sometimes

may not be used. For example, the slider

for the master volume is expressed as

[MASTER VOLUME] in this manual.

• The illustrations and LCD displays

shown here are for explanation pur-

poses only, and may be different than

those that actually appear on the CVP-

98/96.

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PA G E

■ Basic Settings:......................................................................................................

The functions of the CVP-98/96 are set to certain standard values or

standard conditions when the instrument is shipped. These settings and

conditions are called the basic settings. The basic settings of each func-

tion can be changed according to your preferences. Depending on the

settings of the Backup function (page 147), you can have the CVP-98/96

maintain your own edited settings or return to the basic settings after

turning off the power. The Recall function (page 148) lets you restore

the basic settings at anytime.

■ Main display:...........................................................................................................

This refers to the LCD display shown below, which appears first

when turning on the power.

● Pop-up:

When certain panel buttons are pressed, the relevant display appears.

Some of these displays are shown temporarily before returning to the

previous display. These are called “pop-up” displays.

About This Manual

Handling Floppy Disks

The “Music Software Collection” disk and one

blank disk are supplied with the Clavinova.

●Never open or close the key cover while a disk is

extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected posi-

tion). The key cover may contact the disk, possibly

damaging the disk or even the disk drive.

●Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the

disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to

the disk drive or floppy disk.

●Use the 3.5-inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks with

the Clavinova.

■ Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks ...........

●Do NOT eject the disk during recording or play-

back, or at any time when the DISK IN USE

lamp is lit. Doing so may damage both the disk

and the FDD.

●Do NOT turn the Clavinova on or off while the

disk is in the drive.

●Always eject the disk before turning the

Clavinova off.

●When ejecting a floppy disk from the disk drive:

• To eject a floppy disk, press the eject button slowly as far as it

will go. Then when the disk Is fully ejected, remove it by hand.

• The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is

pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough. (The

eject button may become stuck halfway with the disk extending

from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is the case, do not

attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk. Doing so may dam-

age the disk drive mechanism and/or the floppy disk. To remove

a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again

or push the disk back into the slot, then repeat the eject proce-

dure carefully.

■ Protecting Your Data (Write Protect

Tab)............................................................................................

■ Precautions Regarding Floppy Disk

Use.............................................................................................

●Never open the disk’s shutter. Dirt or dust on the

Internal magnetic surface will cause data errors.

●Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other

device that emits a strong magnetic field.

●Do not store disks in places exposed to direct

sunlight or sources of high temperature.

●Do not place heavy objects such as books on top

of a disk.

●Avoid getting the disks wet.

●

Be sure to store the disks in environmental conditions

as specified below:

• Storage temperature: 4

to 53

C (39

to 127

F).

• Storage humidity: 8 to 90% relative humidity.

• Store in an area free from dust, sand, smoke, etc.

●Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper posi-

tion. When changing the label never cover the old

label with a new label; always remove the old

label first.

■ Head Cleaning ...............................................................

The head of the disk drive unit will get dirty as

you use it eventually causing data errors. If this oc-

curs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning

disk (available from most computer supply stores).

■ Data Backup.....................................................................

It is recommended that you copy your recorded

songs to another disk for backup (see page 136). If

the original disk is damaged or your song is deleted,

the backup disk can be used instead of the original.

Write protect tab

closed (unlocked

— write enabled)

Write protect tab

open (locked —

write protected)

DISK IN USE lamp

DISK IN USE

Setting Up the CVP-98/96

Music Stand

■ To raise the music stand:..........................................................................

ZPull the stand up and toward yourself as far as it will go.

XFlip down the two metal supports at the left and the right on the rear

of the music stand.

CLower the music stand so that it rests on the metal supports.

As shown in the illustration, the angle of the music stand can be set in

one of three positions, according to the position of the metal supports.

Set the left and right metal supports to the same position.

■ To lower the music stand: ........................................................................

ZPull the music stand toward yourself as far as it will go.

XRaise the two metal supports (at the rear of the stand).

CGently lower the music stand backward until it is all the way down.

•Do not try to use the music stand in a half-raised position. Also, when lowering the

stand, make sure to press it until it is all the way down.

Key Cover

■ To open the key cover:.................................................................................

ZLift the cover slightly (not too much).

XSlide the cover open.

•Hold the cover with both hands when moving it, and do not release it until it is fully

opened or closed. Be careful to avoid catching fingers (yours or others) between the

cover and main unit.

•Do not place objects on top of the key cover. Small objects placed on the key cover

may fall inside the main unit when the cover is opened and may not be able to be re-

moved. This could cause electric shock, short circuit, fire or other serious damage to

the instrument.

■ To close the key cover:................................................................................

ZSlide the cover toward you.

XGently lower the cover over the keys.

Be careful to avoid catching your

fingers when opening or closing

the cover.

Headphones

Connect a set of stereo headphones (optional) to the [PHONES] jack.

When headphones are connected, the internal speaker system is auto-

matically shut off. Since the CVP-98/96 has two PHONES jacks, two

sets of headphones can be used simultaneously, allowing two people to

enjoy listening to the performance.

ZConnect the power cord.

Insert the plugs at the ends of the cord, one into the AC INLET on the

rear panel of the CVP-98/96, and the other into a standard AC outlet.

Turning on the Power

Setting Up the CVP-98/96

XPress the [POWER] switch. The power is turned on and the main

display appears in the LCD display. The voice of Grand Piano 1 and

the accompanimient style of 8Beat Pop1 are selected automatically at

first. The power lamp whch is located at the left front of the main

unit is lit up.

* If the LCD is difficult to read, adjust the contrast with the [CON-

TRAST] button at the left of the LCD.

* Adjust the volume by using [MASTER VOLUME].

Press [POWER] again when turning off the power. Both the display

and the power lamp at the left of the panel will turn off.

POWER

Standard stereo

phone jack

PHONES

MIN MAX

MIC. VOL. MIC.

Panel Controls and Terminals

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3

B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1

CVP-98

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOM PANIMENT

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO STA RT

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAG E

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN

21 3

&we

! @ # $ % ^

( )

A B C D

OUT

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

THRU

, .

MIDI

vx c

PHONES

MIN MAX

MIC. VOL. MIC.

L+R

AUX IN

AUX OUT EXP. PEDAL

m bn

CVP-98

This is the GM (General MIDI) logo. This indicates

that the CVP-98/96 can playback GM-compatible

disk software. See page 8 in the Reference Manual

for more information on GM.

This is the XG format logo. This indicates that the

CVP-98/96 can playback XG-compatible disk soft-

ware. See page 8 in the Reference Manual for

more information on the XG format.

This is the Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) format

logo. This indicates that the CVP-98/96 can playback

DOC format disks. See page 8 in the Reference

Manual for more information on the DOC format.

This is the Style File logo. This indicates that the

CVP-98/96 can use optional Yamaha Style File

disks. See page 80 for more information on Style

File data.

Volume Section

1[MASTER VOLUME] ....................................page 17

2[ACMP/SONG VOLUME ] ............................page 17

3[DEMO] .........................................................page 24

4[HELP] ..........................................................page 22

5[POWER BASS] (CVP-98) ...........................page 21

Accompanimient Style Section

6STYLE buttons .............................................page 47

7[DISK/CUSTOM]...........................................page 68

8[PIANIST]......................................................page 57

9[HARMONY] .................................................page 62

0[ONE TOUCH SETTING] .............................page 63

![ACMP ON] ...................................................page 57

@[VIRTUAL ARRANGER] ...............................page 64

#[INTRO].........................................................page 51

$[MAIN A]........................................................page 50

%[MAIN B] .......................................................page 50

^[ENDING]...................................................... page 53

&[FADE IN/OUT] .............................................page 52

*[BEAT]...........................................................page 52

([METRONOME] ............................................page 54

)TEMPO [–/+].................................................page 49

Start/Stop Section

q[TAP] .............................................................page 51

w[SYNCHRO]..................................................page 51

e[START/STOP] .....................................pages 50, 53

Display Control Section

r[CONTRAST] ................................................page 15

tPAGE [<], [>] ..............................................page 14

yLCD display ..................................................page 12

The Panel Controls

F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EA SY PL AY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNT H

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZ ER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC

1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PL AY

STOP

POWER

VOICE

REGISTRATION

jkl;

sdA

gSF

uLeft LCD buttons ..........................................page 12

iRight LCD buttons ........................................page 12

oLCD buttons..................................................page 12

p[EXIT] ............................................................page 15

Q[DISPLAY HOLD]..........................................page 15

WData dial .......................................................page 13

E[–/+]...............................................................page 13

R[SONG] .........................................................page 88

T[MIXER] ........................................................page 17

Y[MASTER EQUALIZER]]..............................page 19

U[FUNCTION] ...............................................page 128

Guide Control Section

I[EASY PLAY] ..............................................page 100

O[NEXT NOTE] .............................................page 100

P[SOUND REPEAT] .....................................page 101

Song Control Section

a[PAUSE] ........................................................page 99

s[REW] ...........................................................page 99

d[FF] ...............................................................page 99

f[PLAY/STOP] ................................................page 89

g[REC] ..........................................................page 108

Voice Section

hVOICE buttons .............................................page 27

j[DUAL] ..........................................................page 33

k[SPLIT]..........................................................page 36

l[REVERB] .....................................................page 41

;[EFFECT]......................................................page 44

Registration Section

AREGISTRATION [1] - [4] ..............................page 84

SBANK [–] [+]..................................................page 83

D[MEMORY]....................................................page 84

F[FREEZE]......................................................page 86

GDISK IN USE lamp .........................................page 7

HFloppy disk drive (3.5”) ..................................page 7

J[POWER] ........................................................page 9

KKeyboard guide lamps ...............................page 104

LSoft pedal .....................................................page 40

:Sostenuto pedal ...........................................page 40

zDamper pedal ...............................................page 40

x[MIC.VOL.] ..................................................page 154

c[MIC.] ..........................................................page 154

v[PHONES]...................................................page 154

b[EXP.PEDAL] ................................................page 18

nAUX OUT [R], [L/L+R] ................................page 155

mAUX IN [R], [L/L+R] ....................................page 154

,[TO HOST] ..................................................page 155

.[HOST SELECT].........................................page 155

/MIDI [IN], [OUT], [THRU] ...........................page 155

Basic Operation

Virtually all of the CVP-98/96’s operations are done from the LCD

display. When you press a button on the panel once, the relevant

function’s display appears. Depending on the display that ap-

pears, you can conveniently perform various functions and change

values/settings by using the buttons located directly below, or to

the left or right of the LCD, and the data dial and [–/+] buttons at

the right of the LCD. Once you’re familiar with these operations,

you can easily use other functions in the same way.

LCD Display and LCD Buttons

The five buttons located under the LCD display are referred to as the

LCD buttons. These buttons are used either to select the corresponding

items displayed in the LCD or to change the values. The five buttons

located to the left and right of the LCD display are referred to as the left/

right LCD buttons. These buttons are used to directly select parameters

and settings in the LCD display.

The functions of the LCD buttons differ depending on the selected

LCD. Keep in mind that functions are enclosed in two types of rectan-

gles, one a “soft” rectangle with rounded corners, the other a “hard” rec-

tangle with 90-degree corners.

“Soft” rectangle

(with rounded corners) “Hard” rectangle

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PA G E

Basic Operation

■ When function is within “soft” rectangle:...............................

First press the appropriate LCD button under the display (the selected

item is highlighted), and use the data dial or [–/+] to set the items which

are in “soft” rectangles with rounded corners.

Alternately, after selecting the item, press the LCD button again.

For example, when selecting a voice from the display shown below,

press the LCD button below VOICE ▼ ▲ at the lower right. VOICE

then is highlighted, and you can select the desired voice by using the data

dial or the [–/+] buttons.

Display Highlight

• When selecting an item or parameter

in the display, the indication of the

selected item is highlighted (appears in

reverse display).

When holding down a button...

• In some cases, when one of the LCD

buttons or [–/+] buttons is held down,

the value or setting changes continu-

ously.

For functions or parameters that have ▼ and ▲ or < and > indica-

tions, you can reset the value to its basic value by simultaneously press-

ing both LCD buttons (or both [–/+] buttons).

• There are some functions and param-

eters whose settings cannot be re-

turned to the basic value even by

pressing the

▼

and

▲

buttons, or the

and

buttons simultaneously.

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PA G E

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PA G E

■ When function is within “hard” rectangle:.............................

Items within a “hard” rectangle can be directly selected or switched

ON/OFF by simply pressing the corresponding LCD button located di-

rectly below the desired item.

For example , when selecting the first Demo song in the display

shown below, you can immediately begin playback of the first song by

pressing the LCD button under 1.

Settings which can be selected by using the left and right LCD but-

tons are surrounded by “hard” rectangles. Select these settings directly

by pressing the left or right LCD buttons.

Some of the CVP-98/96’s functions are contained on successive dis-

play pages. To select the next page or previous page, press the appropri-

ate PAGE [<] [>] button. The current page and the entire number of

pages for the function are indicated at the top right of the display.

PAGE [<<

<] [>>

>] Buttons

Basic Operation

[EXIT] Button

Press [EXIT] in order to leave the current mode or return to the pre-

vious display.

[DISPLAY HOLD] Button

The [DISPLAY HOLD] button lets you keep the display from chang-

ing. For example, voices and accompaniment styles can be selected by

pressing the VOICE button or STYLE button. The display of the se-

lected voice/style appears for a few seconds, then changes to the previ-

ous display. Displays such as this that appear briefly are called pop-up

displays. The [DISPLAY HOLD] lamp flashes to indicate that it is the

pop-up display, and that the previous display will appear after a few sec-

onds. By pressing the [DISPLAY HOLD] at this point, the lamp stays

lit continuously and the selected display stays. Pressing [DISPLAY

HOLD] again turns the lamp off and the display returns to the previous

one.

• If [DISPLAY HOLD] is pressed for any

non pop-up display, and the lamp is lit

up, the pop-up display cannot be

opened.

• The duration of pop-up displays can be

set with the Pop-up Time parameter

(page 153).

Adjusting the Contrast of the LCD Display

Turn the [CONTRAST] button in order to adjust the contrast or

brightness of the display.

Basic Operation

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

CONTRAST

Basic Operation

Memory Backup

The Backup function (page 147) can be used to maintain various val-

ues and settings, even after the power has been turned off. In the Backup

function display, each parameter group to be backed up can be selected

individually. Values and settings which are not backed up revert to the

basic settings when the power is turned off.

When set to ON, the last setting of these parameters are retained in

memory even after the power is turned off. For a list of the backup pa-

rameters, see page 147.

If the CVP-98/96 is left unused without the power being turned on for

approximately a week, the backed up data is deleted and all the settings

return to the basic settings. For this reason, you should turn on the

power at least once a week and keep it on for a few minutes.

Backup of the Last Settings

• For parameters which can be set to

Backup ON/OFF, the basic setting is

indicated as “Backup of last settings:

ON (or OFF)” in the explanation of

each parameter.

• Items set to Backup ON can be re-

turned to the basic setting anytime by

using the Recall function (page 148).

Display Messages

For ease of operation, the CVP-98/96 shows various messages that

either prompt you to the next operation, ask for confirmation, or inform

you that the last operation is not effective, valid or appropriate. When

such messages appear, follow the instructions as shown. For details

about each message, please refer to the “Messages” section on page 2 in

the Reference Manual.

Adjusting the Volume

The CVP-98/96 has two sliders on the panel for adjusting the

volume. It also allows you to adjust the volume of each part of the

Automatic Accompaniment or song.

[ACMP/SONG VOLUME]

This determines the playback

volume of the Automatic Ac-

companiment and Songs.

[MASTER VOLUME]

This determines the entire vol-

ume of the CVP-98/96.

• This control has no effect on the vol-

ume of your keyboard performance.

• This also determines the output level

of the signal at the [PHONES] and

[AUX OUT] jacks.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Louder

Softer

Louder

Softer

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

[MIXER]

Call up the Mixer display by pressing [MIXER]. In the Mixer dis-

play, the volume of Automatic Accompaniment and individual parts of a

song can be adjusted. Press [MIXER] again (or [EXIT]) to return to the

previous display.

There are three types of mixer display, as shown below.

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

● Automatic Accompaniment Volume

See Automatic Accompa-

niment volume (page 60) for

details.

See Song volume (page 94)

for details.

See Song volume (page

95) for details.

● Page 1, when using disk

● Page 2, when using disk

Adjusting the Volume

[EXP.PEDAL]

You can control the volume of your keyboard performance with your

foot, by connecting the optional Yamaha FC7 foot controller to the

[EXP.PEDAL] jack of the CVP-98/96.

The volume becomes louder

when pressing the pedal down

with your toes.

EXP. PEDAL

Adjusting the Timbre of the Sound

The sound timbre can be adjusted by using the [MASTER EQUAL-

IZER] and [POWER BASS] (CVP-98 only) controls.

• Distortion could result if these effects are set to higher levels. If this is the case, reduce

the overall volume with the [MASTER VOLUME] control.

[MASTER EQUALIZER]

The lamp lights when the [MASTER EQUALIZER] button is

pressed. The MASTER EQUALIZER display appears, allowing you to

finely adjust the timbre of the sound with a five-band equalizer. Five

preset settings are provided; use these as a basis for making your own

settings. The set values affect all the parts.

■ Changing the Master Equalizer Settings

ZSelect the type of equalization..........................................................

Use the left and right LCD buttons in the MASTER EQUALIZER

display. Six different types are available: FLAT, JAZZ, POPS, ROCK,

CLASSIC, and USER.

➔The central frequency and the gain of the selected type will appear

in the LCD display.

The gain becomes 0 for all frequencies when FLAT is selected.

Central frequency Gain

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

POWER

BASS

MASTER

EQUALIZE R

SONG MIXER FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

MASTER EQUALIZER type

• Basic setting: FLAT

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Adjusting the Timbre of the Sound

XSelect the band (frequency range) to be adjusted. .....

Select the band you wish to adjust by pressing the BAND < or >

button.

➔The central frequency of the selected band (expressed in Hz) is

shown in the BAND < > section of the display.

CChange the value. ............................................................................................

Change the value of the gain either by pressing the GAIN ▼ ▲ but-

tons, or by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

Since the value can be changed during playback, you can adjust the

settings while listening to the changes in the sound.

➔The value is shown in the GAIN section of the display.

If you change the value (even slightly) when any type except USER

is selected, USER will be highlighted and the newly set value will

overwrite the original USER setting.

Gain

• Range: –12 — 0 — +12 (dB)

■ EQ LOCK ON/OFF................................................................................................

When equalizer setting values are contained in the song data or when

the equalizer setting data is received via MIDI, the current settings in the

MASTER EQUALIZER display will overridden by the settings of the

song data or MIDI data. Set the EQ LOCK to ON to prevent reception of

this data, or set to OFF to enable reception.

EQ LOCK ON/OFF

• Settings: ON/OFF

• Basic setting: OFF

Adjusting the Timbre of the Sound

Power Bass (CVP-98 only)

Press the [POWER BASS] button (the lamp lights) to emphasize the

sounds of the lower range.

The amount of the emphasis can be changed by the VOLUME ▼ ▲ but-

tons in the POWER BASS display.

POWER BASS ON/OFF...

• Settings: ON/OFF

• Basic setting: OFF

• Backup of last settings: OFF

VOLUME

of POWER BASS

• Range: 1 — 10

• Basic value: 6

• Backup of last settings: OFF

To turn off the Power Bass function and return the sound to normal,

press the [POWER BASS] button again so that the lamp goes out.

DEMO

HELP

POWER

BASS

CHAPTER 2: Help Mode and Demo

Using the Help Mode

The Help mode provides convenient explanations of the main

functions of the CVP-98/96. As the explanations shown in the

display automatically progress, the CVP-98/96 actually operates

itself in demonstration — the CVP-98/96 sounds various voices

and styles.

ZCall up the Help mode. ...............................................................................

Press the [HELP] button. The Help menu display appears.

• While the Help mode is active, no

other operations can be used.

XSelect the language if necessary....................................................

Select the desired language for help (ENGLISH, GERMAN,

FRENCH, SPANISH or JAPANESE) by pressing the first LCD button at

the bottom.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

HELP

DEMO

HELP

POWER

BASS

• The selected language is always

backed up even after the power is

turned off.

Play

CSelect the desired menu...........................................................................

Use the left/right LCD buttons to select the desired menu.

You can also select the menu by pressing the SELECT ▼ ▲ buttons.

The selected menu is highlighted. Ten menus (listed below) are avail-

able.

VStart the explanation....................................................................................

Press START to begin the explanation of the selected menu.

BStop the explanation. ...................................................................................

When the explanation is finished, the display automatically returns to

the Help menu display. If you wish to stop the explanation while it is

playing and return to the Help menu display, press the STOP button.

You can select another menu and read through other explanations, or

you can exit from the Help mode and to go back to the main display by

pressing [HELP] (or by pressing [EXIT]).

Help Menus

1. Introduction

2. Basic Operation

3. Demo Songs

4. Voices

5. Styles

The display pages are advanced automatically. To pause the explana-

tion, press o. Then, by pressing , you can return to the previous page

and read the explanations.

➾To resume the explanation, press o again.

Using the Help Mode

6. Accompaniment

7. Using ACMP

8. Song Playback

9. Song Recording

10. Function

Demo Play

The CVP-98/96 features a total of 27 demo pieces: 4 entire Demo

songs, 12 special pieces showcasing the voices, and 11 showcasing

the styles. Listen to them all and hear what the CVP-98/96 can do.

ZCall up the Demo Play mode. ..............................................................

Press [DEMO]. The lamps of the STYLE button and VOICE button

flash continuously, and the DEMO display appears.

XSelect the desired Play mode.............................................................

Select the desired play mode by pressing the LCD button at the right.

The following three modes are available:

ALL All the songs play back continuously in order, starting from the

selected song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.

RANDOM All the songs play back randomly, starting from the selected

song. Playback continues repeatedly until stopped.

SINGLE Only the selected song plays back. When the song is finished,

playback stops automatically.

CSelect the song and start playback..............................................

When the song is selected, the Demo automatically plays back in the

currently selected Play mode. There are three ways to play back the

song(s), as described below:

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

DEMO

HELP

POWER

BASS

Demo Play

(A) To listen to a Demo song for voices, press the VOICE

button corresponding to the desired voice.

➔Playback starts from the Demo song of the selected voice. The

lamp of the corresponding VOICE button flashes.

(B) To listen to a Demo song for styles, press the STYLE

button corresponding to the desired style.

➔Playback starts from the Demo song of the selected style. The

lamp of the corresponding STYLE button flashes.

the LCD buttons corresponding to 1 - 4 in the display.

➔The currently selected song number is highlighted during play-

back.

Demo playback can also be started by pressing [START/STOP] or

[PLAY/STOP].

● Playing the keyboard with Demo playback

You can play the keyboard while the demo song is playing back. You

can also change the tempo (page 49) and use the [REW], [FF] and

[PAUSE] buttons. The Guide function (page 100) can also be used when

playing back the “4. GUIDE Demo” song. However, the voice cannot be

changed.

• Demo song data is not output

through the [MIDI OUT] terminal;

however, your keyboard performance

data is output.

STYLE

POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM

PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

CLAVI. TONE

SYN TH

VOICE

VAdjust the volume. ..........................................................................................

Adjust the volume of the Demo by using [MASTER VOLUME].

• The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] control

cannot be used.

BStop playback of the Demo...................................................................

To stop playback, press either [START/STOP], or the appropriate

VOICE button/STYLE button (corresponding to the selected voice or

style), or the appropriate LCD button 1 - 4.

• You can also stop playback by press-

ing [PLAY/STOP].

To exit the Demo mode, press [DEMO] again (or press [EXIT]).

To change songs during song play-

back:

• Press the VOICE button or STYLE

button, or LCD button of another song;

the song then changes. When the

selected Play mode is

ALL

RAN-

DOM

, the selected song begins play-

ing back, and continues according to

the current mode.

Demo Play

● Demo Songs

• Some of the demonstration pieces listed above are specially-arranged excerpts from the original compositions listed above.

SONG DEMO

Title Composer

Song1 Piano Concerto in A minor 1st Mov. Robert Alexander Schumann

Song2 She Wore A Yellow Ribbon (Traditional)

Song4 Red River Valley (American Folk Song)

Title Composer

Piano Etude op.10 No.5 Frederic Francois Chopin

Clavi. Tone/Synth “Gnomes” from “Pictures at an Exhibition” Modest Petrovich Mussorgsky

Organ Fantasia and Fugue in G minor Johann Sebastian Bach

Strings/Choir Symphony No.40 1st Mov. Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart

Brass March and Progression of Bacchus Leo Clement Philibert Delibes

Sax/Flute Londonderry Air (Traditional)

VOICE DEMO

CHAPTER 3: Voices

Selecting Voices

The CVP-98/96 features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, includ-

ing piano, strings and brass instruments. It also features a

Keyboard Percussion function that lets you play the realistic drum

and percussion sounds directly from the keyboard.

● Voice Types

• Clavinova Voices: 133

• XG Voices: 480

• Drum Kit: 12 kits

Selecting a Voice from the VOICE SELECT Display

ZSelect the voice group. ..............................................................................

Select the desired voice group by pressing the appropriate VOICE

button.

➔The pop-up display of the VOICE SELECT display appears.

Pop-up Display

• The pop-up display returns to the

previous display after a few seconds.

You can keep the pop-up display from

changing by using the Display Hold

function (page 15).

Backing Up the Selected Voice

• The last selected voice in each group

can be retained in memory, even after

turning off the power, when the Backup

function (page 147) is set to ON.

• When the power is turned ON, the

GRAND PIANO voice is selected

automatically. However, if the Backup

function (page 147) is set to ON, the

last selected voice will automatically be

selected.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC

1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

CLAVI. TONE

SYN TH

VOICE

* For a list of the voices, see page 26 in the Reference

Manual.

* The voices of the CVP-98/96 are divided into twelve

groups, and each voice group is assigned to the corre-

sponding VOICE button on the panel.

PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

CLAVI. TONE

SYN TH

VOICE

XSelect the voice..................................................................................................

Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate left/right LCD

button.. The data dial and [–/+] buttons can be also used.

You can also select the voice by pressing the VOICE ▼ ▲ buttons.

Some of the VOICE SELECT displays have several successive pages.

Use the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to call up the various pages.

CPlay the selected voice..............................................................................

Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

Automatic Effect Settings

• Selecting a voice automatically selects

the best-suited effects for that particu-

lar voice. You can disable this so that

effects are not automatically selected

by using the Effect Setting parameter

(page 131).

Selecting Voices from the Main Display

You can also select a voice by using VOICE ▼ ▲, even after the

VOICE SELECT display has changed back to the main display.

ZPress either VOICE ▼ or ▲....................................................................

➔VOICE is highlighted.

XSelect the voice..................................................................................................

Select the voice by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons. You can also

select voices by pressing VOICE ▼ ▲. (When selecting a voice in this

way, the voice can be selected not only from a certain voice group but

from all voices.)

CPlay the voice.......................................................................................................

Adjust the volume by using the [MASTER VOLUME] slider.

About XG Voices

• Yamaha’s XG format is a major new

enhancement to the GM (General

MIDI) System Level 1 format. It pro-

vides for more instrument sounds and

variations, as well as greater expres-

sive control over voices and effects.

XG also ensures compatibility with

future instruments and software.

Selecting Voices

Organ Combination (Organ Combi.)

To call up the ORGAN COMBINATION display, press the [OR-

GAN] button and select Organ Combi. in the pop-up display. With

the Organ Combination function in this display, you can select from six

different kinds of organ sounds, and even create your own organ sounds

by editing these voices.

• The edited voices can be backed up in

sets of six by setting VOICE SETTING

to ON (in the Function section’s

Backup parameter, page 147).

■Selecting Organ Combination Voices........................................

Select the desired voice by pressing the left/right LCD buttons in the

pop-up ORGAN COMBINATION display.

➔The settings of the selected voice are shown in the display.

• An asterisk (*) appears next to the

voice name when the selected voice

has been already edited.

■Editing Organ Combination Voices ..............................................

The editing features in this function let you recreate organ voices by

adjusting several footage settings, just as on conventional organs. Vari-

ous organ voices can be created by the setting combinations shown be-

low.

●FOOTAGE display

• Footage volume setting (eight continuous voices corresponding to conven-

tional organ footages)

• Setting the speed of the rotary speaker effect (FAST/SLOW)

●ATTACK display

• Attack Footage volume setting (three decay voices used as percussive

attack sounds)

• Length setting (length of attack sound for decaying voices)

• Response setting (speed of sound starting for continuous voices)

• Attack Mode setting (EACH/FIRST)

•Rotary speed effect: A rich, swirling

chorus effect, created by actual rota-

tion of a speaker.

•Attack sound: A sharp, percussive

sound at the beginning of a note.

•Attack Mode: The manner in which

the attack sound is output.

To create a percussive organ sound, adjust the volume of the decay

sound and the attack length of attack sound to appropriate settings, then

add them to the continuous voice. To recreate the sound of a pipe organ

with a slow attack, set the Response to a large value.

Selecting Voices

■Editing the Voice ...............................................................................................

Select the desired voice for editing, then set each parameter.

The ORGAN COMBINATION has two display pages: [FOOTAGE]

and [ATTACK]. Press the right-most LCD button to change between the

displays. Press the PRESET button in each display to instantly return to

the pre-edited voice.

●Making settings in the ORGAN COMBINATION [FOOTAGE]

display

Footage volume setting

Select the footage “bar” to be adjusted by using the CURSOR but-

tons, then set the volume by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

Setting the speed of the rotary speaker effect

Press the middle LCD button to change between FAST/SLOW.

• To call up the ATTACK display, press

the

CURSOR

button when the cursor

is at “1.”

●Voice Type and Volume Image (About Organ Footages)

The standard pitch is 8 feet. A setting of 4 feet is one octave higher

than 8 feet, 2 feet is two octaves higher, and 1 foot is three octaves

higher; 16 feet is one octave lower.

16-foot

16,

5+1/3-foot

4-foot

2-2/3-foot

2-foot

1+1/3-foot

1-foot

4-foot

2+2/3-foot

2-foot

8-foot

Continuous tones Decay tones

●Making Settings in the ORGAN COMBINATION [ATTACK]

Display

Attack Footage Volume, Length, and Response settings

Select the appropriate bar in the display by pressing the CURSOR

buttons, then set the Volume, Length or Response by using the data

dial or [–/+] buttons.

Setting the Attack Mode

Press the middle LCD button to change between the EACH/FIRST

settings. When set to EACH, the attack sound is applied to all played

notes.

When set to FIRST, the attack sound is applied only to the first

played note in a legato sequence, and is not applied to subsequent

notes played in legato.

Selecting Voices

• To call up the FOOTAGE display,

press the

CURSOR

button when the

cursor is at “4.”

●Image of Attack Length and Response

Volume

Time

Continuous Tone

Greater response time Volume

Time

Decay Tone

Longer attack length

Attack length

Keyboard Percussion

The CVP-98/96 has twelve Drum Kits in the [DRUMS] voice group.

When one of the Drum Kits is selected, various drum and percussion

sounds are assigned individually to the keys, letting you play the sounds

from the keyboard.

The various drum/percussion instruments of the Standard Kit are

marked by symbols above the assigned keys.

See the Drum Kit list on page 32 in the Reference Manual for the

types of percussion sounds in each Drum Kit.

• When a Drum Kit is selected, only the

keys with drum or percussion symbols

printed above them will sound.

• The Transpose (page 130), Tune

(page 130) and Octave Shift (page 35,

38) functions do not affect the Drum

Kits.

Selecting Voices

PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

CLAVI. TONE

SYN TH

VOICE

Playing Two Voices

Simultaneously — Dual Mode

The Dual mode of the CVP-98/96 allows you to select and play two

different voices simultaneously in a layer. This makes it easy to

create exceptionally rich and thick tonal textures. The volume

balance and the depth of detune* can also be set for the two

voices.

*Detune: This lets you finely change the pitch of the two different voices, creating a

“thicker” sound.

Selecting the Dual Voice

ZSelect the first voice.....................................................................................

Select a voice in the normal way. (See page 27.)

XCall up the Dual mode. ...............................................................................

To call up the Dual mode, press the [DUAL] button.

➔The DUAL pop-up display appears.

CSelect the second voice. ..........................................................................

The second voice can be selected from the DUAL pop-up display.

Select the second voice by using the VOICE buttons, and/or the data dial

or [–/+] buttons after pressing RIGHT2 VOICE (it is highlighted).

Pressing RIGHT2 VOICE also advances through the available voices;

holding it down advances continuously.

Second Voice

• Range: All voices

• Basic setting: Strings Slow 1

• Backup of last settings: OFF

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

DUAL

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

After pressing RIGHT1 VOICE or RIGHT2 VOICE (it is high-

lighted), select the voice in the normal way.

• If you select a voice with the VOICE

buttons when

STYLE

▼

▲

is high-

lighted, selection of the

RIGHT1

VOICE

is automatically called up.

VExit the Dual mode. ........................................................................................

Press [DUAL] again; the lamp turns off and the Dual mode is no

longer active.

Setting the Volume Balance of the Two Voices

ZPress BALANCE from the DUAL pop-up display............

➔It is highlighted.

XAdjust the volume balance of the two voices by us-

ing the data dial or [–/+] buttons.....................................................

Pressing BALANCE lets you increase the level of the second voice

only. Equal balance can be instantly reset by simultaneously pressing the

[–/+] buttons.

Volume Balance

• Basic setting: Equal volume

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The Volume Balance setting globally

affects all voice combinations. Differ-

ent settings cannot be made for each

voice.

The second voice can be selected from all available voices, including

the same voice as the first one.

You can also select a voice by using RIGHT1 VOICE or RIGHT2

VOICE, even after the pop-up DUAL display has changed back to the

main DUAL display.

Playing Two Voices Simultaneously — Dual Mode

Changing the Octave Setting of the Two Voices

The Octave Shift setting lets you adjust the pitch of the two voices up

or down an octave.

Press either RIGHT 1 or RIGHT 2 of the OCTAVE SHIFT parameter

in the DUAL pop-up display.

➔The values change each time the LCD button is pressed. Avail-

able settings are –1, 0, and +1.

Detuning the Pitches of the Two Voices

The Detune Depth setting lets you produce an even richer sound by

finely detuning the pitch of the two voices.

ZPress DETUNE DEPTH from the DUAL pop-up dis-

play...................................................................................................................................

➔It is highlighted.

XAdjust the Detune Depth by using the data dial or

[–/+] buttons...........................................................................................................

You can also press DETUNE DEPTH to increase the value. The

higher the value, the greater the Detune Depth.

Detune Depth

• Range: 0 - 10

• Basic setting: 5

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The Detune Depth setting globally

affects all voice combinations. Differ-

ent settings cannot be made for each

voice.

Octave Shift

• Settings: – 1 (1 octave lower)

0 (no octave shift)

+ 1 (1 octave higher)

• Basic setting: 0 (no octave shift)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

About the Sounding Range for Octave

Shift

• Notes below and above the original 88-

key range (A–1 to C7) sound one

octave higher and lower, respectively.

• The

RIGHT1

setting is effective for

normal playing with one voice, and

also affects the

RIGHT1

setting in the

SPLIT mode (page 36).

Playing Two Voices from Different

Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

The Split mode of the CVP-98/96 allows you to select and play two

different voices with your left and right hands — for example, play

bass with the left and piano with the right.

Selecting the Split Voice

ZSelect the voice for the right keyboard range..................

Select the desired voice in the normal way.

XCall up the Split mode. ...............................................................................

To call up the Split mode, press the [SPLIT] button.

➔The SPLIT pop-up display appears.

CSelect the voice for the left keyboard range. .....................

The second voice can be selected from the SPLIT pop-up display.

Select the second voice by using the VOICE buttons, and/or the data dial

or [–/+] buttons after pressing LEFT VOICE (it is highlighted). Pressing

LEFT VOICE also advances through the available voices; holding it

down advances continuously.

The second voice can be selected from all available voices.

Left range voices

• Range: All voices

• Basic setting: Acoustic Bass 1

• Backup of last settings: OFF

F 2

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0

Right-hand section

Left-hand section

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

SPLIT

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

Playing Two Voices from Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

You can also select a voice by using LEFT VOICE or RIGHT1

VOICE, even after the pop-up SPLIT display has changed back to the

main SPLIT display.

After pressing LEFT VOICE or RIGHT1 VOICE (it is highlighted),

select the voice in the normal way.

• If you select a voice with the VOICE

buttons when

STYLE

▼

▲

is high-

lighted, selection of

RIGHT1 VOICE

automatically called up.

VExit the Split mode. ........................................................................................

Press [SPLIT] again; the lamp turns off and the Split mode is no

longer active.

Changing the Split Point

You can set the point dividing the right and left keyboard ranges at

any desired key position.

The basic setting of the Split Point is F#2.

To set the Split Point, press the desired key while holding down the

[SPLIT] button. (The Split Point key is included in the left range.)

➔The keyboard guide lamp corresponding to the selected Split Point

lights, and the key name is displayed at SPLIT POINT in the dis-

play.

Split Point

• Range: All keys

• Basic setting: F

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The Split Point setting globally affects

all voice combinations. Different set-

tings cannot be made for each voice.

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

Playing Two Voices from Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

Setting the Volume Balance of the Two Voices

ZPress BALANCE from the SPLIT pop-up display. ..........

➔It is highlighted.

XAdjust the volume balance of the two voices by us-

ing the data dial or [–/+] buttons.....................................................

Pressing BALANCE lets you increase the level of the right voice

only. Equal balance can be instantly reset by simultaneously pressing the

[–/+] buttons.

Volume Balance

• Basic setting: Equal volume

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The Volume Balance setting globally

affects all voice combinations. Differ-

ent settings cannot be made for each

voice.

The Octave Shift setting lets you adjust the pitch of the two voices up

or down an octave.

Press either LEFT or RIGHT1 of the OCTAVE SHIFT parameter in the

SPLIT pop-up display.

➔The values change each time the LCD button is pressed. Avail-

able settings are –1, 0, and +1.

Changing the Octave Setting of the Two Voices

Octave Shift

• Settings: – 1 (1 octave lower)

0 (no octave shift)

+ 1 (1 octave higher)

• Basic setting: 0 (no octave shift)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

You can also set the Split Point by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons,

after pressing SPLIT POINT in the pop-up SPLIT display. Pressing

SPLIT POINT also advances the value. To reset the value to the basic

setting of F#2, simultaneously press the [–/+] buttons.

• You can use the Damper Range func-

tion (page 134) to set the damper

pedal to affect one or both sides of the

Split. Available settings are:

Only right range

Only left range

Both ranges

• In the basic setting, the damper pedal

affects only the right range.

Playing Two Voices from Different Sides of the Keyboard — Split Mode

About the Sounding Range for Octave

Shift

• Notes below and above the original 88-

key range (A–1 to C7) sound one

octave higher and lower, respectively.

• The

RIGHT1

setting is effective for

normal playing with one voice. This

setting also affects the

RIGHT1

setting

in the DUAL mode (page 33).

• You can use the Single Finger, Multi

Finger, or Fingered modes (page 56)

of the Automatic Accompaniment

function with the Split mode. In this

case, pressing the keys in the left

range will sound the Automatic Accom-

paniment voices as well as the left

range voice.

Using the Dual and Split Functions Simultaneously

The [DUAL] and [SPLIT] buttons can be turned on simultaneously.

The right range set for the Split mode can be used with two voices (Dual)

when using the Dual and Split modes simultaneously.

• The volume balance of Dual and Split

can be set individually.

• The Octave Shift

RIGHT1

parameter is

set the same for both Dual and Split.

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

Using the Pedals

The CVP-98/96 has three pedals.

Damper Pedal (Right)

The damper pedal performs the same function as the damper pedal on

an actual acoustic piano, letting you sustain the sound of the voices even

after releasing your fingers from the keys.

• Certain voices in the [DRUMS] or [XG]

groups may not be affected by use of

the damper pedal.

Sostenuto Pedal (Center)

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto

pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as

the pedal is held, but all subsequently played notes will not be sus-

tained. This makes it possible to sustain a chord, for example, while

other notes are played staccato.

• Certain voices in the [DRUMS] or [XG]

groups may not be affected by use of

the sostenuto pedal.

• Certain voices, such as [STRINGS] or

[BRASS], sustain continuously when

the sostenuto pedal is pressed.

Soft Pedal (Left)

Pressing this pedal reduces the volume and slightly changes the tim-

bre of the notes you play.

You can also assign one of many other functions to this pedal; for

example, you can use it to start/stop the Automatic Accompaniment, or

use it to play Fill Ins. See page 133 for details.

• The effect of the soft pedal may differ

slightly depending on the selected

voice.

Reverb

Reverb is an effect that recreates the decaying reflections of a sound in

a performance space, and reproduces the special ambience of a concert

hall. The CVP-98/96 has various Reverb effects and allows you to set the

Reverb Depth to your preference. The Reverb effect here is also applied

to the microphone input signal received via the [MIC.] jack.

• The same Reverb Type is applied to both the sound of the CVP-98/96 and the microphone input.

Reverb ON/OFF

To turn on reverb, press the [REVERB] button. The lamp lights and

Reverb is set to ON.

➔The REVERB pop-up display appears, indicating the current Re-

verb Type and Depth settings.

To turn Reverb off, press [REVERB] again. The lamp turns off and

Reverb is no longer active.

Reverb ON/OFF

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the voice.

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The REVERB ON/OFF panel button

has no effect on the Song, Accompani-

ment playback and microphone sound.

• The Reverb applied to the microphone

signal is always on. To turn it off, set

the Reverb Depth to “0”.

• When Reverb is on, the Reverb icon

“ ” and the Reverb Type are indi-

cated in the main display.

Selecting the Reverb Type

Select the Reverb Type by pressing the left/right LCD buttons in the

REVERB pop-up display.

Reverb Type

• Range: (Refer to the Reverb Type

list.)

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the accompaniment style. (The as-

signed type for the selected style will

automatically be selected. In other

words, when you select a different

style, the reverb type corresponding to

the new style will automatically be

selected.)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

REVERB

Keep in mind...

• Depending on the selected voice, the

depth of the effect may sound stronger

or weaker, even though the same

Reverb Type is selected.

• The effect cannot be applied to the

sounds input through the AUX IN [R]

[L/L+R] jacks.

Setting the Total Depth

The overall depth of the selected Reverb Type can be set with the

Total Depth parameter (TOTAL DEPTH ▼ ▲).

You can also set it by pressing TOTAL DEPTH ▼ ▲ (it is highlighted)

and using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

The values can be changed in 5-unit steps. To reset the value to the

basic setting of 50, simultaneously press REVERB TYPE ▼ ▲ or simul-

taneously press the [–/+] buttons.

Total Depth

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 100 (maxi-

mum)

• Basic setting: 50

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The Total Depth setting globally affects

all voices. Different settings cannot be

made for each voice.

• Different Reverb Depth settings can be

made for each part. (Refer to the next

section.)

Reverb

● Reverb Type List

You can also select the Reverb Type by using the REVERB TYPE ▼

▲ buttons, or by pressing REVERB TYPE (to highlight the parameter)

and using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

• The Reverb Type setting globally

affects all voices. Different settings

cannot be made for each voice.

• The indication “XG REVERB” is dis-

played when receiving via MIDI a

reverb type which is not on the panel.

HALL1

HALL2

HALL3 Concert hall reverb.

HALL4

HALL5

ROOM1

ROOM2 Small room reverb.

ROOM3

ROOM4

STAGE1

STAGE2 Reverb for solo instruments.

STAGE3

PLATE Simulated steel plate reverb.

WHITE ROOM Distinctive short reverb with initial delay.

TUNNEL Simulation of long tunnel-like space.

BASEMENT Small, highly reflective room reverb.

• If the Reverb Type in Effect (page 45)

is selected and both [REVERB] and

[EFFECT] are set to on, both reverb

effects will be applied.

Setting the Depth for Each Part — Reverb Part Depth

The Reverb Part Depth parameter lets you make different Reverb

Depth settings for the microphone input connected to the [MIC.] jack,

the rhythm, bass, and chord parts of the Automatic Accompaniment

(page 47), as well as the parts you play from the keyboard.

To use this, call up the REVERB PART DEPTH display in the second

page of the REVERB pop-up display by using the PAGE [<] [>] but-

tons.

Select the desired part by using the MIC., BASS, CHORD,

RHYTHM and KBD (keyboard) in the REVERB PART DEPTH display.

You can also select several parts and adjust their settings simultaneously.

➾Set the Reverb Depth of the highlighted part by using the data dial

or [–/+] buttons. The values can be changed in 5-unit steps.

You can also advance the Depth value by pressing MIC., BASS,

CHORD, RHYTHM or KBD (keyboard). To reset the value to the basic

setting of 50, simultaneously press the [–/+] buttons.

Reverb Part Depth

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 100 (maxi-

mum) for each part

• Basic setting: 50 for each part

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The actual Reverb Depth is dependent

on both the Part Depth and Total

Depth settings. In other words, if one

of the settings is “0” (no effect), no

Reverb will be produced even if the

other setting is “100.”

Reverb

Voice Effects

The CVP-98/96 has various types of effects besides Reverb that

enhance the sound of the voices or create wild, special effects.

You can also adjust the depth of the effect as desired. The Effect

here is also applied to the microphone input signal received via

the [MIC.] jack.

Automatic Effect Settings

• Selecting a voice automatically selects the best-suited effects for that

particular voice. You can disable this so that effects are not automati-

cally selected by using the Effect Setting parameter in the Function sec-

tion (page 131).

• The same Effect Type is applied to both the sound of the CVP-98/96 and

the microphone input.

To turn Effect on, press [EFFECT]. (The lamp lights.)

➔The EFFECT pop-up display appears and the current Effect Type

and Depth are shown.

Effect ON/OFF

• If the Effect Depth is set to 0, the [EF-

FECT] lamp will not light.

To turn Effect off, press [EFFECT] again. (The lamp turns off.)

Effect ON/OFF

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the voice.

• Backup of last settings: OFF

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

EFFECT

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

• When Effect is on, the Effect icon

“ ” and the Effect Type are indi-

cated in the main display.

Selecting the Effect Type

Select the Effect Type by pressing the left/right LCD buttons in the

EFFECT pop-up display.

You can also select the Effect Type by using the EFFECT TYPE ▼ ▲

buttons, or by pressing EFFECT TYPE (to highlight the parameter) and

using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

To reset the value to the basic setting, simultaneously press EFFECT

TYPE ▼ ▲ or simultaneously press the [–/+] buttons.

The Reverb Types in the list below can also be selected from the ef-

fect display.

• Range: (Refer to the Effect Type list.)

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the voice.

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• When other effect type or OFF mes-

sages are received via MIDI,

XG EF-

FECT

is indicated in the display.

• The word “delay” refers to the echo-

like effect of delayed repeats of the

sound.

● Effect Type List

When Using the DUAL or SPLIT Func-

tion:

• When the effects of both voices are set

to ON, and the types are different, the

effect for the second voice of the Dual

mode or the left voice of the Split mode

may be temporarily cancelled in some

cases. After this point, if you subse-

quently increase the Effect Depth

value of the second voice of Dual

mode or of the left range voice of

SPLIT mode, the effects will be applied

to both voices.

Voice Effects

Reverb Types (selectable from the Effect display)

Effect Types

• If the Reverb Type in Effect is selected

and both [REVERB] and [EFFECT] are

set to on, both reverb effects will be

applied.

STAGE1

STAGE2 Reverb for solo instruments.

STAGE3

HALL1

HALL2 Concert hall reverb.

HALL3

ROOM1

ROOM2 Small room reverb.

ROOM3

DELAY L,R Initial delay for each stereo channel,

and two separate feedback delays.

ECHO Stereo delay.

CROSS DELAY Complex effect that sends the de-

layed repeats “bouncing” between

the left and right channels.

TREMOLO Rich Tremolo effect with both volume

and pitch modulation.

ROTARY FAST Rotary speaker simulation.

ROTARY SLOW Rotary speaker simulation.

PHASER Pronounced, metallic modulation with

periodic phase change.

WAH Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

CHORUS1 Conventional chorus program with

CHORUS2 rich, warm chorusing.

CHORUS3

CELESTE Three-phase LFO for richer, more

pronounced chorusing.

FLANGER Pronounced three-phase modulation

with slight metallic sound.

SYMPHONIC Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

AUTO PAN Several panning effects that auto-

matically shift the sound position (left,

right).

DELAY L,C,R Three independent delays, for the

left, right and center stereo positions.

Setting the Effect Depth

The Effect Depth parameter lets you adjust the degree or depth of the

currently selected effect type. To set this, press R1 DPT or MIC DPT

(to highlight the corresponding parameter), and use the data dial or [–/+]

buttons.

Depending on the currently selected voice, the R1 DPT indication

may automatically change to the R2 DPT, or L DPT.

Use MIC DPT to set the Effect Depth applied to the microphone input

connected to the [MIC.] jack.

Effect Depth

• Range: 0 (no effect) — 100 (maxi-

mum)

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the voice. (microphone = 0)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Pressing R1 DPT or MIC DPT also advances the value. To reset the

value to the basic setting, simultaneously press the [–/+] buttons.

• If the Effect Depth is set to 0, the [EF-

FECT] lamp will not light.

You can easily restore the basic settings of the selected voice’s EF-

FECT TYPE and R1 DPT parameters by pressing RESET in the display.

Restoring the Basic Settings

The following parameters can be selected by first selecting the corre-

sponding voice from the main display of the Dual or Split modes.

Voice Effects

R1 DPT First voice of Dual mode or right voice of Split mode

R2 DPT Second voice of Dual mode

L DPT Left voice of Split mode

Selecting Accompaniment Styles

The CVP-98/96 has 100 musical “Styles” that can be used as a

basis for rhythm accompaniment, or fully orchestrated rhythm,

bass, and chord accompaniment (Auto Accompaniment; page

56).

• The CVP-98/96 also features forty special [PIANIST] styles consisting of

only piano voices, which you can use with the Auto Accompaniment fea-

ture. (These styles will not sound if Auto Accompaniment is not in use.)

(See page 57.)

● Auto Accompaniment

Auto Accompaniment provides full instrumental backing, using all

the parts included with the style. When not using Auto Accompaniment,

only the rhythm part sounds. (For details on Auto Accompaniment, see

page 50.)

• For information on the styles, see the

Style List on page 34 in the Refer-

ence manual.

The 100 preset Styles of the CVP-98/96 are divided into eleven

groups, and each style group is assigned to the corresponding STYLE

button on the panel.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

STYLE

POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

PIANIST

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM

BEAT

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

CHAPTER 4:

Accompaniment Styles

(Rhythm and Auto Accompaniment)

Selecting a style from the STYLE SELECT Display

ZSelect the accompaniment style group...................................

Select the desired style group by pressing the appropriate STYLE

button.

➔The STYLE SELECT pop-up display appears.

Pop-up Display

• The pop-up display returns to the

previous display after a few seconds.

You can keep the pop-up display from

changing by using the Display Hold

function (page 15).

• The last selected style in each group

can be retained in memory, even after

turning off the power, when the Backup

function (page 147) is set to ON.

• When the power is turned ON, the

8Beat Pop1 style is selected automati-

cally. However, if the Backup function

(page 147) is set to ON, the last se-

lected style will automatically be se-

lected.

XSelect the Style...................................................................................................

Select the desired style by pressing the appropriate left/right LCD

button.

The data dial and [–/+] buttons also can be used.

You can also select the style by pressing the STYLE ▼ ▲ buttons.

Selecting Accompaniment Styles

Selecting styles from the Main Display

You can also select a style by using STYLE ▼ ▲, even after the

STYLE SELECT display has changed back to the main display.

When Style Buttons are Inactive

• Accompaniment style cannot be se-

lected in the Song Play mode.

STYLE

POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM

Selecting Accompaniment Styles

ZPress either STYLE ▼ or ▲....................................................................

➔STYLE is highlighted.

XSelect the style. ..................................................................................................

Select the style by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons. You can also

select styles by pressing STYLE ▼ ▲. (When selecting a style in this

way, the style can be selected not only from a certain style group but

from all styles.)

[DISK/CUSTOM]

• The CVP-98/96 features a [DISK/

CUSTOM] button that allows you to

use styles on optional Style File Disks

(page 80) or your original styles (page

68) .

Tempo Control and Volume Adjustment

Whenever you select a different style, the preset tempo for that style

is also selected, and the tempo is shown at the left side in the main dis-

play. (Unless you try changing the style during playback, in which case

the same tempo is maintained.)

Press the TEMPO [–/+] buttons. (The tempo indication in the main

display is highlighted.)

➔Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to set the tempo. You can also

press either TEMPO [–/+] button briefly to decrement or increment

the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous

decrementing or incrementing. (In the STYLE SELECT pop-up

display, only the TEMPO [–/+] buttons can be used.)

Tempo

• Range: 32 — 280

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the style.

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Restoring the Basic Style Tempo

• You can restore the preset tempo for

the selected Style at any time by simul-

taneously pressing both TEMPO [–/+]

buttons.

Use [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] to control the volume of the style.

RESET

TEMPO

Tempo

display

Decrementing

the tempo Incrementing

the tempo

Starting/Stopping

the Accompaniment Style

Starting the Accompaniment Style

There are several ways to start the accompaniment style, as described

below:

● Auto Fill

Press the [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] button during playback of the

style. The lamp of the button flashes and the Fill-in pattern plays auto-

matically.

■After automatic playback of the Fill-in, the rhythm pattern will

change as described:

• When Main A is playing back and [MAIN A] is pressed

→ Changes to [MAIN A].

• When Main A is playing back and [MAIN B] is pressed

→ Changes to [MAIN B].

• When Main B is playing back and [MAIN A] is pressed

→ Changes to [MAIN A].

• When Main B is playing back and [MAIN B] is pressed

→ Changes to [MAIN B].

■ Straight Start...........................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button.

➔The lamp lights up and the style starts.

Each of the styles also has two main variations that can be selected by

pressing the [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] buttons. The lamp of the

cuurently selected pattern lights. Main A is the basic pattern of the style

and Main B is a variation or rearrangement of the Main A. Judicious

switching between Main A and Main B patterns within a song can add

variety and make the overall rhythm more interesting. Switching during

playback automatically plays a fill in (Auto Fill) before changing to the

new pattern.

The Fill-in pattern keeps repeating when [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] is

held down.

If you press the flashing button earlier than the last eighth note of the

measure while the Fill-in is playing back, the Auto Fill function will be

released.

If you press [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] after the last eighth note of the

measure during style playback, the pattern changes to the Fill-in pattern

from the next measure.

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

■ Synchronized Start...........................................................................................

This method lets you start the style by simply playing a note or chord

on the keyboard.

To use this, press the [SYNCHRO] button. (The lamp lights.) The

[BEAT] lamp flashes in time with the selected tempo, indicating that

Synchronized Start is in stand-by. (To cancel Synchronized Start, press

the [SYNCHRO] button again so the lamp turns off.)

Press one of the [INTRO], [MAIN A], or [MAIN B] buttons to se-

lect the starting pattern, then play the keyboard to start the Style.

• If the [SYNCHRO] is pressed during

style playback, style playback stops

and Synchronized Start is automati-

cally set to stand-by.

• When the Split mode is used or when

a split point is set for Auto Accompani-

ment, only the left-hand section of the

keyboard can be used for Synchro-

nized Start. (See page 36.)

■ Tap Start .......................................................................................................................

This function lets you set the tempo and start the style in one opera-

tion.

Simply tap the [TAP] button at the desired tempo — four times for

2- and 4-beat styles, three times for 3-beat styles, and five times for 5-

beat styles.

When playing a 4-beat song... → ...tap 4 times.

The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during style

playback (by tapping the button twice). In this case the tap “click” will

not sound.

• If you do not tap the [TAP] button the

required number of times (i.e., 3 times

for a 3-beat style), the Tap Start func-

tion will be canceled after a few sec-

onds.

■ Start With an Introduction ........................................................................

First press the [MAIN A] button, then the [INTRO] button. (The

[INTRO] lamp lights and the [MAIN A] lamp flashes.) This indicates

that the style will start with the Intro A pattern and be followed automati-

cally by the Main A pattern.

To cancel starting with an introduction, press the [INTRO] button so

that the lamp turns off.

To start the style, press the [START/STOP] button, or press the

[SYNCHRO] button and play a note or chord on the keyboard.

➔The [INTRO] lamp turns off and the [MAIN A] lamp lights when the

pattern changes from Intro A to Main A.

Starting/Stopping the Accompaniment Style

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

There are two introduction patterns: Intro A and Intro B.

If you press [INTRO] after pressing [MAIN B], the style starts with

the Intro B pattern, followed by Main B.

■ Start with Fade In ...............................................................................................

This function lets you gradually fade in the volume of the Style with

any of the start methods above.

Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button (the lamp lights) and fade in start

is set to stand-by.

Press the [FADE IN/OUT] button again to turn the lamp off and can-

cel the fade in start.

To start the style, press the [START/STOP] button, or press the

[SYNCHRO] button and play a note or chord on the keyboard.

➔The lamp flashes during the fade in, and the lamp turns off when

the fade in is completed.

[FADE IN/OUT] can be set to on no matter which pattern

([INTRO], [MAIN A], [MAIN B], [ENDING]) is selected.

■ Starting styles with the Left Pedal ..................................................

You can also use the left pedal to start the style by setting the the Left

Pedal function (page 133) to Start/Stop. The pedal can also be set to

control Break, Fade-in/out, Fill-in, or Ending. This setting is exception-

ally convenient, since it lets you control the style with your foot while

leaving both hands free to play.

■ [BEAT].............................................................................................................................

During style playback, the left-most beat lamp (red) flashes on the

first beat of each measure, and the other lamps (green) flash for each

successive beat. The current tempo and measure number are shown at

the left side of the LCD display.

Starting/Stopping the Accompaniment Style

• If you press the [MAIN A] button before

pressing [INTRO] and then press

[MAIN B], playback starts with Intro A

and continues automatically with the

Main B pattern. (The reverse is also

true: i.e., selecting Intro B with [MAIN

B] before pressing [INTRO], then

pressing [MAIN A] to continue with

Main A.)

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

Starting/Stopping the Accompaniment Style

Tempo

display

Measure

number

Beat lamp

Break

When the Left Pedal function (page 133) is set to BREAK, you can

use the left pedal to trigger a break (silence) in the accompaniment for

dynamic effect.

Holding down the left pedal creates the break, and playback resumes

from the top of the next measure after the pedal is released.

To cancel the break, press the left pedal again during the break.

Stopping the accompaniment style

To stop style playback, press the [START/STOP] button.

To playback an ending pattern before stopping, press the [ENDING]

button.

Press [ENDING] a second time during playback to produce a

ritardando (gradually slowing) ending.

Different ending patterns are provided for the MAIN A and MAIN B

variations. (The [ENDING] lamp lights during ending playback). The

[MAIN A] lamp also lights when changing from the Main A pattern, and

the [MAIN B] lamp lights when entering from Main B.) The ending

begins from the top of the next measure if the [ENDING] button is

pressed on or after the second beat of a measure.

You can have the accompaniment fade out (gradually decrease in

volume to silence) and automatically stop by pressing the [FADE IN/

OUT] button. Then, it automatically sets to fade in stand-by (the lamp

lights) and stays in this condition for a few seconds before releasing.

[FADE IN/OUT] can be set to on no matter which pattern

([INTRO], [MAIN A], [MAIN B], [ENDING]) is selected.

When the Left Pedal function (page 133) is set to START/STOP, you

can stop the style by using the left pedal.

BEAT

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

Using the Metronome

■ [START/STOP] of Metronome ...............................................................

To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button so

that its lamp lights.

➔The metronome pop-up display appears and the currently selected

beat and volume are indicated.

The CVP-98/96 features a convenient metronome that is ideal for

practicing.

The metronome can be used also during playback.

Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome sound.

(The METRONOME lamp turns off.)

■

Adjusting the Tempo and Volume of the Metronome

.........

As with the same parameter for the style, you can set the tempo over

a range of 32 — 280 by using the TEMPO [–/+] buttons.

Press the TEMPO [–/+] buttons. (The tempo indication in the Main Dis-

play is highlighted.)

➔Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to set the tempo. You can also

press either TEMPO [–/+] button briefly to decrement or increment

the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous

decrementing or incrementing.

Metronome Volume

• Range: 0 — 100

• Basic setting: 50

• Backup of last settings: OFF

RESET

TEMPO

METRONOME

The metronome volume can also be set from the METRONOME

pop-up display.

Adjust the volume by selecting VOLUME ▼ ▲ (it is highlighted) and

using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

You can also adjust it by continuously pressing VOLUME ▼ or ▲.

As with the volume parameter of the style, it can also be adjusted by

using [ACMP/SONG VOLUME].

■ Selecting the Beat (Time Signature)..............................................

The pop-up display that appears when the [METRONOME] button

is pressed also lets you select the beat or time signature.

Select the Beat parameter with BEAT ▼or ▲ (it is highlighted), then

change the value with the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

You can also select the value by holding down BEAT ▼or ▲.

When NORMAL is selected, the metronome click sounds continu-

ously at the current tempo with no accented beats.

The 2, 3, 4 and 5 selections produce a bell accent on the first beat of

each measure.

Using Style and Metronome Together

• If a style is started by pressing the

[START/STOP] button while the metro-

nome is playing, the metronome will

continue to sound along with the style.

• Pressing the [START/STOP] button

simultaneously stops both the metro-

nome and the Style, when both the

metronome and style are playing.

When Playing Back Free-tempo Disk

Software

• The metronome cannot be used when

playing disk software that is in free-

tempo (see page 90).

Using the Metronome

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

The CVP-98/96 includes a sophisticated Auto Accompaniment

system that can provide automated rhythm, bass and chord

backing for your performance in 100 different styles.

• The playback data of the Auto Accompaniment is normally not output

through the MIDI [OUT]. However it can be output via MIDI by using the

Auto Accompaniment/Harmony Send parameter (page 146) in the Func-

tion MIDI 3 page.

The Auto Accompaniment function lets you produce automatic ac-

companiment in the selected style simply by indicating chords on the

keyboard.

● Single Finger

The Single Finger method makes it easy to produce accompaniment

using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing cer-

tain keys (according to simple rules) in the left range of the keyboard

(lower than the split point indicated by the keyboard guide lamp) . (See

page 58.)

● Fingered

The Fingered method lets you produce automatic accompaniment by

playing full chords in the left range of the keyboard (lower than the split

point). (See page 59.)

● Multi Finger

With Multi Finger, you can use either the Single Finger or Fingered

method to indicate chords for the accompaniment. (See page 59.)

● Full Keyboard

Full Keyboard automatically produces appropriate automatic accom-

paniment for virtually anything you play on the keyboard, in any range.

(See page 59.)

Types of Auto Accompaniment

• Detailed explanations of the use of

Single Finger, Multi Finger, Fingered,

and Full Keyboard are given on pages

58 and 59.

ZSelect a style.........................................................................................................

Select the desired style. (See page 47.)

When Style Buttons are Inactive

• Accompaniment style cannot be se-

lected in the Song Play mode.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

STYLE

POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

PIANIST

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM

BEAT

METRONOME RESET

TEMPO

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

● Pianist

Press the [PIANIST] button to select the piano-only accompaniment

styles. Forty different Pianist styles are available.

When the [PIANIST] button is pressed, the STYLE SELECT [PI-

ANO] pop-up display appears.

➔The [PIANIST] lamp lights.

Select the desired Pianist style by pressing the appropriate left/right

LCD button. The data dial and [–/+] can be also used.

You can also select the Pianist style by pressing the STYLE ▼ ▲ but-

tons.

CSet the Auto Accompaniment function to ON. .................

To do this, press the [ACMP ON] button. (The lamp lights.)

➔The Accompaniment Mode pop-up display appears.

The STYLE SELECT [PIANO] display has

several successive pages. Use the PAGE [<] [>]

buttons to call up the various pages.

XSet the tempo. ......................................................................................................

• When the Auto Accompaniment func-

tion is set to ON, Synchro Start is

automatically set to stand-by.

Press the [ACMP ON] button again to turn off the lamp and set Auto

Accompaniment to OFF.

When the [ACMP ON] Button is Inac-

tive

• The [ACMP ON] button cannot be

turned on during playback of commer-

cially available disk software. When

playing back songs recorded with the

recording function of the CVP-98/96, it

cannot be turned on if Auto Accompa-

niment has been recorded to the song;

however, it can be turned on if Auto

Accompaniment is not used for the

song. Also, it cannot be turned on if

the song data was converted by use of

the Transform function.

RESET

TEMPO

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

PIANIST HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

VSelect the chord indication method. ...........................................

To do this, press one of the left LCD buttons — SINGLE FINGER,

MULTI FINGER, FINGERED or FULL KEYBOARD — while the AC-

COMPANIMENT MODE pop-up display is active.

Chord Indication Method

• Basic setting: Multi Finger

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The

SYNCHRO STOP

(page 64),

SMALL ACMP

(page 65),

SPLIT

POINT

(page 61), and

CHORD ASSIST

(page 66) functions shown in the AC-

COMPANIMENT MODE display are

explained later (see corresponding

page references).

BStart the Auto Accompaniment.........................................................

To start Auto Accompaniment, press [START/STOP]. Alternately,

press [SYNCHRO], then play the keyboard. Auto Accompaniment can

also be started by using the left pedal (see page 133).

• Major

Press the root note of the chord.

■ Single Finger Chords

The following four chord types can be played with Single Finger:

• The illustration below shows the corre-

sponding keys for each root note.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

Chord name

• Minor

Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any

black key to the left of it.

• Seventh [7]

Simultaneously press the root note of the chord and any

white key to the left of it.

• Minor Seventh [m7]

Simultaneously press the root note of the chord any white

and black key to the left of it (three keys altogether).

CDEFGAB

● Single Finger

To play Auto Accompaniment appropriate to the

selected style, press one, two, or three keys in the

left range (below and including the split point), fol-

lowing the rules described below.

➔Chord names appear at the left side of the

LCD display.

Play the melody with the keys in the right range

along with the Auto Accompaniment.

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

● Fingered

To play Auto Accompaniment, play any chord in the left range (below

and including the split point). Play the melody in the right range along

with the Auto Accompaniment.

If the CVP-98/96 cannot recognize the played chord, “*” will appear

instead of the chord name in the display.

■ Fingered Chords

The chord types below can be played with the Fingered method. For

a fingering chart showing all chords in the example key of C, see

page 36 in the Reference Manual.

• The automatic accompaniment will

sometimes not change when related

chords are played in sequence (e.g.

some minor chords followed by the

minor seventh).

• The same accompaniment continues

even after releasing the chord in the

left range until the next chord is

played.

On-bass Chords

• To play “on-bass” chords, press the

desired bass note one octave lower

than the chord. For example, in order

to play F on C (F chord with a C bass),

play an F chord (F, A and C) and press

C +C (octave notes) in the lower range

of the keyboard. (Use this function for

chord sequence recording.)

• Two-note fingerings will produce a

chord based on the previously played

chord.

• “No chord” (i.e., rhythm-only accompa-

niment) can be produced by pressing

any three consecutive keys (e.g., C,

, D) simultaneously. This lets you

create dynamic rhythm “breaks in the

accompaniment. A “- - -” indication will

appear instead of a chord name in the

display.

● Multi Finger

This method allows you to produce accompaniment using either Sin-

gle Finger or Fingered. However, when indicating minor, seventh or

minor seventh chords, it is necessary to play the white key and/or black

key nearest the root note of the chord.

● Full Keyboard

When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the CVP-98/96 will auto-

matically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about

anything using both hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You don’t have

to worry about specifying the accompaniment chords. The name of the

detected chord will appear in the display. (Although Full Keyboard is

designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suit-

able for use with this feature.)

• Chord detection occurs at approxi-

mately 8th-note intervals. Extremely

short chords — less than an 8th note

in length — may not be detected.

Keep in mind...

• The DUAL or SPLIT mode can be

used with the Auto Accompaniment.

Press [START/STOP], [ENDING] or [FADE IN/OUT] to stop the

Auto Accompaniment.

You can also turn off the Auto Accompaniment by pressing the

[ACMP ON] button (the lamp turns off).

Stopping the Auto Accompaniment

• The [INTRO], [MAIN A], [MAIN B],

[ENDING], and [FADE IN/OUT] but-

tons can be used to play different style

sections, as explained on page 50.

• Major

• Sixth [6]

• Major seventh [M7]

• Major seventh flatted fifth [M7 (b5)]

• Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7 (#11)]

• Added ninth [add 9]

• Major seventh ninth [M7 (9)]

• Six ninth [6 (9)]

• Flatted fifth [(b5)]

• Augmented [aug]

• Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]

• Major seventh augmented [M7 (#5)]

• Minor [m]

• Minor sixth [m6]

• Minor seventh [m7]

• Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]

• Minor added ninth [m add 9]

• Minor seventh ninth [m7 (9)]

• Minor seventh eleventh [m7 (11)]

•

Minor major seventh flatted fifth

[mM7 (b5)]

• Minor major seventh [mM7]

• Minor major seventh ninth [mM7 (9)]

• Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]

• Diminished seventh [dim7]

• Seventh [7]

• Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

• Seventh ninth [7 (9)]

• Seventh sharp eleventh [7 (#11)]

• Seventh added thirteenth [7 (13)]

• Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]

• Seventh flatted ninth [7 (b9)]

• Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7 (b13)]

• Seventh sharp ninth [7 (#9)]

• Suspended fourth [sus4]

Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME]

control to adjust the overall volume of the

Auto Accompaniment. (This does not affect

the volume of parts played from the key-

board.) This control lets you adjust the level

balance of the accompaniment and the

voices played from the keyboard.

Use the [MASTER VOLUME] to con-

trol the entire volume of the CVP-98/96.

Adjusting the Overall Auto Accompaniment Volume

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Individual Part Volume Control

The CVP-98/96 has five accompaniment parts: Bass, Chord, Pad,

Phrase, and Rhythm.

BASS The Bass part uses voices appropriate to each style, including

acoustic bass and synth bass.

CHORD The Chord part provides appropriate rhythmic chordal accom-

paniment for each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other

chordal instruments here.

PAD The Pad part plays long chords where necessary, using sus-

tained instruments such as strings, organ, and choir.

PHRASE The Phrase part is used for embellishments such as punchy

brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the

accompaniment more interesting.

RHYTHM This is the main rhythm part. The Rhythm part usually plays

one of the drum kits.

• By adjusting the volume balance of the

various parts and setting some parts’

volume to 0, you can create different

types of accompaniment and make

changes to the basic style accompani-

ment.

• Some styles may not use all five ac-

companiment parts.

Each volume setting of the five accompaniment parts can be adjusted

individually by using the mixer function. Press the [MIXER] button

(the lamp lights) and the MIXER display appears.

The [MAIN A], [MAIN B], [ENDING]

and [FADE IN/OUT] operation can be

done by using the left pedal (see page

133), conveniently allowing you to

change sections without taking your

hands from the keyboard.

Volume of Each Part

• Range: 0 — 100 (maximum)

• Basic setting: KBD (keyboard vol-

ume): 100; other parts: 90

• Backup of last settings: OFF

START

STOP

TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

Playing with the Auto Accompaniment

Select the desired part by pressing BASS, CHORD, PAD, PHRASE,

or RHYTHM and set the value by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

The value changes in units of two. You can also select several parts and

adjust their volume settings simultaneously. To reset the value to the

basic setting of 90, simultaneously press the [–/+] buttons.

To exit the function, press the [MIXER] button again (the lamp turns

off) and the previous display appears.

You can also press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous dis-

play.

Use the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to call up the second page of the

MIXER display. On this page you can adjust the volumes of your

own keyboard performance and the Harmony sound (see page 62).

Press KBD (keyboard volume) or HARMONY to select the part

and use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to set the value.

Press PRESET to return the volume values of all parts to the basic

setttings.

Part Volume Relation

• [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is relative to

the [MASTER VOLUME].

• Each part volume of the Auto Accom-

paniment is relative to the [ACMP/

SONG VOLUME].

• KBD (keyboard volume) is relative to

the [MATER VOLUME].

• The Harmony part volume is relative to

the KBD part volume.

Reverb Depth of Each Part

• For details on setting the Reverb

Depth for each part, see page 43.

The split point also can be set by pressing the SPLIT POINT

▼ or ▲ button, or by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

To reset the value to the basic setting of “F#2,” simultaneously

press both SPLIT POINT ▼ ▲ buttons or the [–/+] buttons.

Changing the Split Point

The right range and left range for Auto Accompaniment can be di-

vided at any key. Press the desired key while holding the [ACMP ON]

to set the split point. (The split point key is included in the left range.)

➔The keyboard guide lamp of the set split point lights.

Split Point

• Range: All keys

• Basic setting: F

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The split point cannot be set when

FULL KEYBOARD

is selected.

SONG MIXER FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

INTRO

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

• The split point set here for the Auto

Accompaniment is the same parameter

as set in the Split function (page 37).

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

The CVP-98/96 has many other features and functions that make

the use of the Auto Accompaniment even more convenient and

enjoyable.

Harmony

This feature adds harmony or embellishment notes to the melody you

play in the right range of the keyboard. The harmony notes are produced

automatically to match chords played with Auto Accompaniment.

ZSet the Harmony function to ON. ....................................................

To do this, press the [HARMONY] button (the lamp lights).

➔The ACCOMPANIMENT HARMONY pop-up display appears.

➾Use the the left/right LCD buttons to select the Harmony types in

the ACCOMPANIMENT HARMONY pop-up display. The data dial

and the [–/+] buttons can also be used.

You can also select the Harmony type by using the HARMONY ▼

▲ buttons.

• The Harmony feature cannot be turned

on when Full Keyboard is selected for

the Auto Accompaniment.

XPlay the keyboard............................................................................................

Play the keyboard along with the Auto Accompaniment.

• With some Harmony types the voice

used for the Harmony will be different

from the currently selected voice.

• The Harmony feature can be used

while playing back the intro or ending

or while the Auto Accompaniment is

off, but only octaves (no intermediate

harmonies) will be produced.

• When chords are played in the right-

hand section of the keyboard, the

harmony will be applied to the last note

played.

CTurn Harmony off. ............................................................................................

To turn Harmony off, press the [HARMONY] button again (the lamp

turns off).

Since the Harmony function can be turned on and off while playing,

you can add “spice” and professional polish to your performance by ap-

plying harmony to selected phrases as you play.

PIANIST HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

● Left Pedal and Harmony

If the Left Pedal Function is set to HARMONY ON/OFF (see page

133), harmonization of notes played on the right-hand section of the key-

board only occurs while the left pedal is pressed. This allows you to add

harmony only to certain phrases in the middle of the song as you play,

without having to take your hands from the keyboard.

• The Left Pedal HARMONY ON/OFF

function is not effective when the Har-

mony feature is off (i.e. the [HAR-

MONY] lamp is not lit).

Each style has programmed panel setups of voices and effects that

can be recalled easily and instantly via the One Touch Setting function.

Each style has four different One Touch Settings.

For a list of the One Touch Setting parameters, refer to page 35 of the

Reference Manual.

One Touch Setting

• There are no One Touch Settings for

the accompaniment styles of the [PI-

ANIST] or [DISK/CUSTOM] groups.

■ Using the One Touch Setting Function......................................

ZSelect the desired style in the normal way, then press the [ONE

TOUCH SETTING] button.

➔The lamp lights and the One Touch Setting pop-up display ap-

pears.

• When using the ONE TOUCH SET-

TING function, the Auto Accompani-

ment turns on automatically.

If the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button

is turned on before starting the style,

Synchronized Start is set to stand-by.

• If you change the One Touch Setting

during style playback, the tempo set-

ting remains the same.

• Harmony will not be turned on if the

Full Keyboard mode is selected, even

if the selected One Touch Setting

setup includes “Harmony On.”

XSelect the desired setting by using the left/right LCD buttons. The

data dial, [–/+] buttons, and PAGE [</>] buttons can also be used.

You can also select the setting by using the SELECT ▼ ▲ buttons.

Press the SET button to actually change the panel setup to that of the

selected setting.

The menu for the selected style is shown at first in the display;

however, the menus for all other styles can be selected in this display.

PIANIST HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

The panel setup called up here can be freely changed according to

your preferences. You can also save it to memory by using the

Registraiton function (page 83).

To exit One Touch Setting, press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING]

button again (the lamp turns off), and the previous panel setup before

using One Touch Setting is recalled.

Virtual Arranger

To use this, press the [VIRTUAL ARRANGER] button (the lamp

lights). The lamp automatically lights when the power is turned on.

With Virtual Arranger, you can play simple chords, and the CVP-98/96

automatically embellishes them and provides melodic Auto Accompani-

ment.

Virtual Arranger is effective only when Auto Accompaniment is set to

ON and the Full Keyboard mode is not selected.

• The melodic Auto Accompaniment

may sometimes not match with the

melody or chord progression of the

song being played.

• When a [DISK/CUSTOM] style is

selected, the Virtual Arranger function

has no effect, even if set to on.

This function lets you have the Auto Accompaniment sound only

when you hold down keys in the left-hand range (below and including

the split point). Auto Accompaniment automatically stops when you

release your left hand from the keyboard, and starts again when you play

the keys again. This is useful for beginning players who have difficulty

playing in precise time. It is also effective for creating accompaniment

“breaks” during the performance.

This function can only be used when Auto Accompaniment is set to

on. However, it cannot be used when Full Keyboard is selected.

Synchronized Stop Function

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

Press the [ACMP ON] button to call up the ACCOMPANIMENT

MODE pop-up display.

➾Press SYNCHRO STOP so that it is highlighted.

➔The [SYNCHRO START] lamp lights.

To turn Synchronized Stop off, press SYNCHRO STOP again.

The Small Accompaniment function lets you mute some of the se-

lected Auto Accompaniment parts, creating a simpler and smaller orches-

tration and accompaniment.

Press [ACMP ON] to call up the ACCOMPANIMENT MODE pop-

up display.

➾To turn Small Accompaniment on, press the SMALL ACMP button

so that it is highlighted.

To turn Small Accompaniment off, press the SMALL ACMP button

again.

Small Accompaniment (SMALL ACMP)

•

SMALL ACMP

can be set to ON when

a [PIANIST] style is selected; however,

the Auto Accompaniment sounds are

not changed.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

Chord Assist

This function uses the keyboard guide lamps to show you appropriate

fingerings for chords. (See page 104.)

The Chord Assist feature is essentially an electronic “chord book”

that shows you appropiate fingerings for chords, and is ideal when you

want to quickly learn how to play certain chords. Simply specify the

desired chord via the display, and the fingerings of the Fingered method

are indicated by the keyboard guide lamps.

ZSet the Chord Assist function to ON. .........................................

To do this, first press the [ACMP ON] button to call up the ACCOM-

PANIMENT MODE pop-up display.

➾Press CHORD ASSIST to set the Chord Assist function to on. The

CHORD ASSIST display appears and the chord indication auto-

matically changes to Fingered.

XStart the Auto Accompaniment. .......................................................

Press [START/STOP] or use Synchronized Start (see page 50) to

start the Auto Accompaniment.

CEnter the chord root......................................................................................

Press ROOT (it is highlighted), then use the data dial or [–/+] buttons

to select the desired root note of the chord.

You can also select the root note by pressing ROOT.

Other Auto Accompaniment Functions

VEnter the chord type.....................................................................................

Press TYPE ▼ or ▲ (it is highlighted), then use the data dial or [–/+]

buttons to select the desired chord type.

You can also select the chord type by pressing TYPE.

BEnter the chord...................................................................................................

The fingering for the selected chord appears on the keyboard guide

lamps. And the selected chord is also indicated in notation form in the

center of the LCD display. At this point you can either play the indicated

chord on the keyboard or press ENTER to actually enter the specified

chord, at which the specified chord accompaniment will sound.

The following chord types can be specified from the LCD display.

Major [Maj]

Minor [m]

Seventh [7]

Minor seventh [m7]

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7 (b5)]

Sixth [6]

Minor sixth [m6]

Major seventh [M7]

Suspended fourth [sus4]

Augmented [aug]

Minor flatted fifth [m (b5)]

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

Seventh augmented [7 (#5)]

Diminished seventh [dim7]

Flatted fifth [(b5)]

Seventh flatted fifth [7 (b5)]

Minor major seventh [mM7]

• All the Fingered chords can be entered

from the keyboard.

• The root and type of the chord name

entered from the LCD appears in the

ROOT

and

TYPE

parameter locations,

while the chord name recognized from

the keyboard (or entered by the

ENTER

button) appears at the side of the

keyboard icon located at the left of the

LCD.

• A flashing keyboard guide lamp indi-

cates a note which may be omitted.

NRotate the fingering as desired........................................................

Press INVERT in the LCD to shift the fingering down the keyboard.

Each time the INVERT button is pressed the next viable fingering for the

chord appears. The inversion number appears in the INVERT section of

the display.

MStop the Auto Accompaniment.........................................................

Use [START/STOP] or [ENDING] to stop the accompaniment.

<Turn Chord Assist off. .................................................................................

To turn Chord Assist off, press the [ACMP ON] button (the lamp

turns off). Auto Accompaniment also is turned off at the same time.

• The split point is not shown on the

guide lamps when the Chord Assist

function is engaged.

• If the split point is set below F

2 it will

automatically be reset to F

Custom Style

The CVP-98/96 Custom Style feature allows you to create original

accompaniment styles that can be later recalled and played at any

time, just like the presets. Up to 12 custom styles can be maintained

in internal memory at the same time, and any number can be saved

to disk for later reloading and use.

The basic custom style recording procedure is outlined below.

• Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned off,

so be sure to save your custom styles to disk before turning the power off.

• One pre-programmed temporary style is automatically loaded into the [DISK/

CUSTOM] memory whenever the power is turned on. (Memory is common

to the Custom Styles and the loaded styles from the optional Style File disks

— page 80.)

ZEngage the Custom Style feature. .................................................

Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] style selector so that its indicator lights,

then press the CUSTOM STYLE LCD button. The “Please select a

source style.” message will appear on the display for a few seconds

before going to the CUSTOM STYLE display page 1 and the current

[DISK/ CUSTOM] style will begin playing.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

DISK

CUSTOM

STYLE

POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM

CSelect the section you want to record. .....................................

In the CUSTOM STYLE display page 1, press the first LCD button

as many times as necessary to select the section you want to program

first: MAIN A, MAIN B, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING. The MAIN A

section is initially selected.

Custom Style

• In the CUSTOM STYLE, MAIN A,

MAIN B, INTRO, FILL IN or ENDING

are referred to as “section”, and

RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, CHORD 1/2,

PAD or PHRASE 1/2 are referred to as

“part”.

• Only one pattern can be created for

each INTRO, FILL IN and ENDING

section.

• Whether the “A” or “B” variations of the

INTRO, FILL IN and ENDING sections

are used as the source pattern de-

pends on whether the MAIN A or MAIN

B section was selected when the Cus-

tom Style function was engaged. (As

for FILL IN, “FILL IN from A to A”, or

“FILL IN from B to B” is used.)

Beat of the selected style

Current measure number of

the selected section

Total measure number of

the selected section

XSelect a source style....................................................................................

Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset

style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 47).

If you want to select a [DISK/CUSTOM] style, press the [DISK/

CUSTOM] style button once again and use the STYLE ▲ and ▼ but-

tons, or the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select a [DISK/CUSTOM] style.

VChange the time signature and number of meas-

ures, if required..................................................................................................

If you want to create a style in a different time signature than the cur-

rent style, or change the number of measures in the selected section,

Press the PAGE [>] button to go to CUSTOM STYLE display page 2.

Current recording

section and part

Use the BEAT LCD button to select a different time signature, or the

data dial or [–/+] buttons once the BEAT parameter has been selected. As

soon as you choose to change the beat value, the “Clear style ?”

prompt will appear, since you will have to completely clear all sections

and parts of the style and start recording from scratch if you change the

time signature. Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once

the style has been cleared you can select a new time signature as re-

quired: 2, 3, 4, or 5.

Custom Style

Use the MEASURE LCD button to select a different number of meas-

ures for the selected section, or the data dial or [–/+] buttons once the

MEASURE parameter has been selected. As soon as you choose to

change the number of measures in the section, the “Clear section ?”

prompt will appear, since you will have to clear all parts of the currently

selected section and start recording from scratch if you change the

number of measures. Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort.

Once the section has been cleared you can select a new number of meas-

ures as required: 1 through 8. The FILL IN section has only 1 measure

and the number of measures cannot be changed although the FILL IN

section can be cleared using this operation.

Once the BEAT and/or MEASURE parameters have been set as re-

quired, press the PAGE [<] button to go back to the first Custom Style

page.

Custom Style

BSelect the part and voice you want to record...................

Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [–/+] buttons to select the

part you want to record:

R1 Rhythm 1

R2 Rhythm 2

Bs Bass

C1 Chord 1

C2 Chord 2

Pd Pad

P1 Phrase 1

P2 Phrase 2

Playback part

At this point you can also select the voice you want to record with

(the preset voice for that part will initially be selected). For the R1 part,

only [DRUMS] voices can be used. For the R2 part, all voices except

Organ Combi. voice can be used. For the remaining parts, all voices ex-

cept [DRUMS] and Organ Combi. voice can be used.

The R1 part is initially selected and set to the record mode.

Any part you select can be set to the record mode by using the rightmost

LCD button to select “RECORD” after selecting the part (the part

number will be highlighted). Since parts other than R1 and R2 must be

cleared before they can be recorded (if the source style is a preset style or

a style loaded from the optional Style File disk) the “Clear part ?”

confirmation will appear if you select a part that contains data: press OK

to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort. Only one part can be

set to the record mode. All other parts will be set to “PLAY” (part

number surrounded by box) or turned “OFF” (part number only — no

box). No indication appears for the parts that contain no data.

Recording part Part containing no data

OFF

Custom Style

NRecord the selected part..........................................................................

You can now add new parts to the selected part by playing the key-

board at the appropriate timing (play in C Major seventh since the Cus-

tom Style is recorded as a C Major seventh pattern). If you want to create

a totally new part from scratch, press the CLEAR LCD button to clear

the selected part before beginning to record. If both the R1 and R2 parts

are cleared the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide (the met-

ronome sound is not recorded). When a drum kit voice is used, a single

drum instrument sound can be cleared from the R1 or R2 part by press-

ing the key corresponding to the instrument to be cleared while holding

the keyboard “C1” key. The metronome timing guide can also be cleared

in this way.

• Playback can be started and stopped

via the [START/STOP] button as re-

quired while in the Custom Style mode

— data cannot be recorded while

playback is stopped.

MQuantize the recorded part, if necessary...............................

You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by aligning all

notes to specified beats via the PART QUANTIZE function in CUSTOM

STYLE display page 2 (press the PAGE [>] button). Press the LCD but-

ton below the note symbol to select “quantize size” — i.e. the beats to

which the notes in the current part will be aligned:

Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this

button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press

the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear the entire

style.

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

• The timing guide will stop as soon as

the Custom Style is stored.

• The sound of all parts is automatically

stopped at the end of the style — i.e.

at the point between repeats when

recording. It is therefore not advisable

to record over this point.

• Quantization can also be applied to the

already recorded part.

Custom Style

• During Custom Style recording, no

MIXER display is available.

Once the required quantize size has been selected press the START

LCD button to actually quantize the current part. Playback will stop for

an instant while the data is being quantized, then the START LCD button

will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the quantize operation and

return to the pre-quantized data if the results are not as you expected.

You will not be able to UNDO once another button has been pressed.

<Repeat until the custom style is complete...........................

Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all parts or all sections have been re-

corded as required.

>Name the custom style...............................................................................

When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select

CUSTOM STYLE display page 3, and press the STYLE NAME LCD

button to go to the style naming page.

The current style name appears in the upper right corner of the dis-

play. Use the CHAR LCD button to position the underline cursor at the

character you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in

length). Use the data dial and/or the [–/+] buttons to select the character

you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the

CHAR SET LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor posi-

tion. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The BACK

SPACE LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete a char-

acter.

When the name is complete press the OK LCD button to register the

name for the current custom style, or CANCEL to abort.

Custom Style

?Store the custom style. ..............................................................................

Press the STORE LCD button in CUSTOM STYLE display page 3 to

store the current custom style in the internal memory. The “Store

XXXXXXXX?” confirmation prompt and MEMORY No. parameter

will appear (“XXXXXXXX” is the style name). Use the MEMORY No.

▲ and ▼ LCD buttons to select the memory number — 1 through 12 —

to which you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store or

CANCEL to abort.

[Exit when done...................................................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Custom Style mode and

return to the normal play mode.

• Custom style data is not retained in

memory when the power is turned off,

so be sure to save your custom style

before turning the power off — see

“Save to disk” on page 76.

• The tempo setting at the time the

Custom Style is stored becomes the

preset tempo for that style.

• If the selected memory number already

contains a style, the style name will

appear next to the memory number.

The existing style will be overwritten

when a new style is stored.

Other Custom Style Functions

In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom style recording procedure, above, the

CUSTOM STYLE display pages include several other functions that you may find useful when creating

custom styles.

■Recall Section ......................................................................................................

This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the

currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply

press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in CUSTOM STYLE display

page 2. If the recall operation can’t be carried out (i.e. The time signature

has been changed), the “Can’t recall!” alert display will appear. If

this happens press OK to return to the previous display.

EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

Custom Style

■Style Clear ................................................................................................................

Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in CUSTOM STYLE display

page 3 to entirely clear the current custom style. The “Are you

sure?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to clear the style or

NO to abort.

■Volume & Effects...............................................................................................

CUSTOM STYLE display page 4 includes a range of parameters that

let you individually set the volume, reverb, effect, and pan for each part

of each custom style section. Use the SECTION parameter to select the

section (or “ALL” sections), and the PART parameter to select the part

(or “ALL” parts). The third LCD button selects VOLUME, REVERB,

EFFECT or PAN, and the VALUE (or DEPTH) parameter sets the

amount or depth. When VOLUME is selected the SECTION parameter

is fixed at “ALL” and the VALUE range is from –50 to +50, relative to

the preset volume of the source style. The REVERB and EFFECT

DEPTH ranges are from 0 to 100. The PAN VALUE settings are L10 (full

left) … C (center) … R10 (full right). When EFFECT is selected the

TYPE parameter appears and you can also select the effect type via the

TYPE LCD button. The available effect types are listed below.

• Normally the preset VALUE and EF-

FECT TYPE are initially selected. If

PART is set to “ALL”, the R1 part

preset values are displayed. If SEC-

TION is set to “ALL”, the MAIN A pre-

set values are displayed.

• Effect type “OTHERS” may appear if

the preset effect type is other than that

of what is in the list. The “OTHERS”

selection cannot be re-selected once

you change to a different type.

Effect Type List

• CHORUS 1

• CHORUS 2

• CHORUS 3

• CELESTE 1

• CELESTE 2

• CELESTE 3

• FLANGER 1

• FLANGER 2

• OFF

Custom Style

After making sure that a properly formatted disk is inserted in the

Clavinova disk drive (page 7), use the MEMORY No. ▲ and ▼ buttons

to select the memory number of the custom style you want to save to

disk, or “ALL” if you want to save a complete set of 12 custom styles.

When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to start saving the data to

disk. At this point the name entry display will appear and you can enter a

name for the Custom Style disk file in the same way as you entered a

name for the Custom Style itself (page 73). Press SAVE when the name

has been entered. If a file with the same name already exists the “Same

name! Overwrite?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press OK to

overwrite the existing file or CANCEL to abort.

• Saved Custom Style files can be

loaded via the “STYLE FILE LOAD”

function described in the “Style File

Load” section (page 80).

■Save to Disk............................................................................................................

A complete set of 12 custom styles or individual custom styles can be

saved to disk via CUSTOM STYLE page 5.

Your custom styles must be stored to internal memory before they can

be saved to disk (see step 10 of the basic custom style recording proce-

dure). If a custom style has not been stored and you attempt to save it to

disk, the “Please store to memory before saving to disk”

alert display will appear. If this happens press OK to return to the previ-

ous display (CUSTOM STYLE display page 3), store the custom style,

then try saving again.

■Delete from Disk ................................................................................................

Saved custom styles can also be deleted from disk via CUSTOM

STYLE page 5.

After making sure that the disk containing the custom style files is

inserted in the Clavinova disk drive, press the DELETE LCD button. Use

the FILE ▲ ▼ LCD buttons to select the custom style file you want to

delete from disk. The “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear.

Press YES to delete the custom style file or NO to abort.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Custom Style mode and

return to the normal play mode.

Custom Style

Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for play-

back by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button (its LED will light), and

then using the STYLE ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons — or the data dial or [–/+]

buttons — to select the custom style you want to play. The selected style

can then be played and used with ABC auto accompaniment in exactly

the same way as the preset styles (page 47).

• Since only one type of INTRO, FILL IN,

and ENDING section can be recorded

for each Custom Style, no “A/B” varia-

tions are produced during playback.

Playing Back Your Custom Styles

Custom Style

■Memory Full During Recording..........................................................

This alert message will appear if the memory becomes full during

recording or editing.

Custom Style Alert & Error Displays

The following alert and error displays may appear in the corresponding situations.

■Insufficient Memory To Store ..............................................................

This alert message will appear if there is not enough memory to per-

form a store operation.

In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you don’t need

or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to re-

turn to CUSTOM STYLE display page 1, at which point you can sim-

plify the current style (by clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to go to the

“Delete style ?” display:

Use the MEMORY No. ▲ and ▼ buttons to select the number of the

style you want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL

to abort.

• The amount of memory being used for

the selected style is also shown on the

display (in approximate kilobytes) so

as to set up the approximate standard

which style to delete in relation to the

total 300 KB memory space.

■Exit Before Store........................................................................................................

If you press [EXIT] button to exit from the Custom Style function before

storing the style the following display will appear.

Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and then exit,

press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to the

Custom Style mode.

Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and then select

the new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.

• If you want to select a different

source style without storing the

current style, exit from the CUS-

TOM STYLE mode without storing

the style (see “Exit Before Store”

above), and then re-enter the

CUSTOM STYLE mode.

Press OK to return to CUSTOM STYLE display page 1 and simplify the

style by clearing a part, etc.

■Style Change Before Store..............................................................................

If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the current

style you recorded, the following display will appear.

Custom Style

Style File Load

Style files from optional Yamaha “Style File” disks, or disks contain-

ing custom style files you’ve created yourself, can be loaded into the

CVP-98/96 and played as required.

About the Yamaha Style File Format

• The Style File Format is Yamaha’s original auto-accompaniment format which

has evolved through years of development and refinement. Style File Format

allows you to use exceptionally high quality accompaniments with a variety of

chord types through its unique conversion system. In addition to the internal

styles, the optional style disks let you use different sophisticated styles cre-

ated with the Style File Format.

• Loaded disk styles will be retained in memory only until the power is turned

off.

• One pre-programmed temporary style is automatically loaded into the [DISK/

CUSTOM] memory whenever the power is turned on.

ZInsert the Style Disk.......................................................................................

Insert the Style File Disk into the disk drive with the sliding door on

the disk facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk

should click into place and the DISK IN USE lamp will light briefly

while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. When an appropriate

Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display (see step 2

below) will appear automatically. If the disk is already inserted and the

STYLE FILE LOAD display is not showing, press the [DISK/CUS-

TOM] selector to call the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display and press the

LOAD SINGLE button.

Loading Disk Styles

• If a disk containing both song and style

files is loaded, the SONG PLAY mode

will automatically be selected. In this

case press the SONG [PLAY] button

so that its indicator goes out to exit

from the SONG PLAY mode, then

press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

DISK

CUSTOM

DISK IN USE

A set of 12 files saved by using the Custom Style save “ALL” func-

tion (page 76) can be loaded by pressing the ALL LOAD LCD button

rather than the LOAD SINGLE button. The rest of the ALL LOAD pro-

cedure is essentially the same as the LOAD SINGLE procedure, as fol-

lows.

XSelect a Style File .............................................................................................

To select the desired style, use the left/right LCD buttons. You can

also use the STYLE ▲ ▼ buttons, data dial, or [–/+] buttons.

You can “preview” the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD

button (the “LISTEN” function is not available in the ALL LOAD dis-

play).

• If a tempo is set prior to loading the

style, that tempo becomes the default

for the loaded style.

• Some styles are too large for the LIS-

TEN function. In this case the “Too

much data for LISTEN function! Please

load data.” alert display will appear. In

this case load the style directly as in

step 3.

• ABC is automatically turned on when

the LOAD SINGLE button is pressed

and the style is played back automati-

cally with the ABC accompaniment in

C Major when the LISTEN LCD button

is pressed. You can also change the

chord or try playing on the keyboard if

you like.

CSelect a Memory Number & Load the Style .........................

Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to

which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 12), then press the

LOAD LCD button to load the style file.

Repeat Step 2 and 3 to select and load more style files as you like.

Press the LISTEN LCD button again or the [START/STOP] button

to stop listening.

• If the selected memory number already

contains a style, the style name will

appear at the lower right in the display.

The existing style will be overwritten

when a new style is loaded.

Style File Load

VEject the Disk When Done ......................................................................

When you’ve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive

EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display.

You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by

pressing the [EXIT] button or a STYLE selector.

• The DISK IN USE lamp will light while

the style is being loaded. NEVER

attempt to remove a disk while the

DISK IN USE lamp is lit.

• The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT] and style

buttons will not function while the style

data is being loaded (i.e. while the

DISK IN USE lamp is lit).

Using Loaded Style Files

Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the

[DISK/CUSTOM] button (its LED will light), and then using the

STYLE ▲ and ▼ LCD buttons — or the data dial or [–/+] buttons — to

select the style you want to play. The selected style can then be played

and used with ABC auto accompaniment in exactly the same way as the

preset styles (page 47).

• The amount of memory being used for

the selected style is also shown on the

display (in approximate kilobytes) so

as to set up the approximate standard

which style to delete in relation to the

total 300 KB memory space.

Style File Load

It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is

selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort.

If there is not enough memory to load the specified file the “Not

enough memory! Delete an unneeded style ?” alert dis-

play will appear. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style you

don’t need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY No. ▲ and

▼ buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then press

DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.

• The ALL LOAD display is as follows:

When ALL LOAD is executed, all data

in the 12 memories will be replaced by

new data.

STYLE

POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

CUSTOM

CHAPTER 5: Registrations

Registrations

(Registering/Recalling Panel Setups)

The Registration feature can be used to memorize a number of

complete panel setups that you can recall whenever needed. A

total of 20 setups (5 banks x 4 memories) can be registered.

ZSet up the controls as required........................................................

For a list of the parameter settings memorized by the Registration

function, refer to page 35 of the Reference Manual.

XSelect a Registration bank.....................................................................

Press the BANK [–] [+] buttons to display the banks below and to the

right of the style name in the main display.

Select one of the five banks: A — E.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF R EC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

REGISTRATION

1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

REGISTRATION

CRegister the panel setup..........................................................................

While holding the [MEMORY] button, simultaneously press one of

the REGISTRATION [1] — [4] buttons. Any data that was previously in

the selected location is erased and replaced by the new settings. The

corresponding Registration number (bank/button number) and the Regis-

tration name will appear below and to the right of the style name in the

main display. “A-1 (number 1 of bank A)” and “REGIST A-1” (tempo-

rary Registration name) will appear next to the RE mark.

Registration

• Range: Bank: A— E, Button: 1 — 4

• Basic setting: Pre-programmed set-

tings are registered in all Registration

numbers.

• Backup of last settings: ON

• The REGISTRATION [NAME] pop-up

display appears when pressing the

[MEMORY] button; however, this

display is not necessary in registering

the panel setup.

• The data for each Registration or a

group of 20 Registrations can be

saved to floppy disk, for future recall.

(See page 139.)

Press the BANK [–] [+] buttons as described above (in step #2) to

select the bank corresponding to the desired Registration. Then, simply

press the corresponding REGISTRATION [1] — [4] button to recall the

desired Registration. The recalled Registration number (bank/button

number) and the Registration name will appear below and to the right of

the style name in the LCD display. A pencil icon appears at the right of

the Registration name in the display as soon as any change is made to the

panel buttons or settings. In other words, if the pencil icon is displayed,

the current panel settings are different from those stored in memory.

• Only selecting a different bank will not

change the Registration settings.

• The Registration settings are recalled

only when one of the REGISTRATION

[1] — [4] buttons is pressed.

• If the Left Pedal function is set to “Reg-

istration” (see page 133), the left pedal

can be used to step through the Regis-

trations, letting you recall a different

Registration each time the pedal is

pressed. However, other left pedal

settings assigned to each Registration

cannot be recalled in this case.

Registered Registration

number and name

Edit Symbol

Recalling the Registered Panel Settings

Registrations (Registering/Recalling Panel Setups)

1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

REGISTRATION

Registrations (Registering/Recalling Panel Setups)

Naming the Registration

A temporary name is given to the Registration setup when you regis-

ter the panel settings; however, you can change this name freely with this

function.

ZPress the [MEMORY] button to call up the REGIS-

TRATION [NAME] pop-up display...................................................

➾Select the number of the Registration whose name you wish to

change by using the left/right LCD buttons. The data dial and [–/+]

buttons also can be used.

XPress the NAME button to call up the display for en-

tering the name. .................................................................................................

Use the CHAR> button to move the underline cursor to the desired char-

acter position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12 char-

acters in length).

You can also select the Registra-

tion number by using the BANK ▼

▲ or REGIST ▼ ▲ buttons.

➾Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select and high-

light the character or mark you wish to enter.

Press the CHAR SET button to enter the selected

character to the current cursor position in the file

name. Continue entering other characters or marks

in this way until you complete the name.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK

SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and

the cursor moves back to the deleted position.

To abort the Registration naming operation and return to the main

display, press the CANCEL button.

When the Registraion name is complete, press the OK button to regis-

ter it. The display will return to the main display and the Registration

name is indicated below and to the right of the style name.

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

Freeze Function

When the Registration Freeze function is set to on, the parameters set

in the FREEZE display will not be changed when a Registration is re-

called. This allows you to recall different Registrations while using the

Auto Accompaniment, without suddenly changing the styles or volume

settings.

ZPress [FREEZE] (the lamp lights), and the REGIS-

TRATION FREEZE pop-up display appears. .......................

Parameters set to Freeze ON appear with

an asterisk (*), and “ON” (in the ON/OFF

section) is highlighted.

XSelect the desired parameter. .............................................................

Select the desired parameter by using the left LCD buttons, then set

Freeze to ON or OFF by pressing the ON/OFF button.

You can also select the parameter by using the CATEGORY ▼ ▲ but-

tons, data dial, or [–/+] buttons.

• The Registration Freeze function re-

mains on even if the banks are

changed.

Freeze Parameters

• Basic setting: ACMP SETTING

Freeze ON (other parameters: OFF)

• Backup of last settings: ON

Registrations (Registering/Recalling Panel Setups)

Freeze parameters

• For a list of the Freeze parameters,

see page 35 in the Reference Manual.

To cancel the Registration Freeze function, press [FREEZE] again

(the lamp turns off).

1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

REGISTRATION

DISK IN USE

CHAPTER 6: Song Control

Song Playback

In this manual, the recorded music data of your performance, and

the song data of various disk software are all referred to as

“songs.”

The CVP-98/96 can play back songs you’ve recorded yourself

using the Song Record function (page 105), and other songs of

various musical styles. You can also play along on the keyboard

with the songs as they play back. Moreover, with song data

software that includes lyrics, you can view the lyrics in the display

during playback.

Playback

ZEnter the Song Play mode. ....................................................................

Gently insert the included “Music Software Collection” disk or a disk

containing songs you’ve recorded yourself into the disk drive. Make

sure to insert the disk face up in correct direction, as shown in the illus-

tration, until it clicks into place. The Song Play mode is automatically

called up when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive.

• The Song Play mode is not automati-

cally engaged from the disk-related

FUNCTION displays, or the CUSTOM

STYLE display — even when inserting

the disk.

Sliding shutter

Label

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

• Consult your Yamaha dealer for information on song data that is compat-

ible with the Lyric Display function of the CVP-98/96.

• See the section “Handling Floppy Disks” (page 7) for information on using

floppy disks.

• Playback data cannot be output via MIDI.

Playback of Different Disks

• In addition to songs you’ve recorded yourself, the CVP-98/96 can play

back commercially available disks of Yamaha DOC software, XG software,

and Disklavier PianoSoft as well as GM software. See the section “Playing

Other Types of Music Data” on page 99.

➔The DISK IN USE lamp lights while the CVP-98/96 reads and

identifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified, the SONG

PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1) appears in the display and

the [SONG] lamp lights.

If a song disk is already inserted but the Song Play mode is not en-

gaged, press the [SONG] button.

➔The [SONG] lamp lights. Press the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to se-

lect the first page, if the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display is not shown.

XSelect a song number. ................................................................................

Select the desired song number for playback by using the SONG ▼ or

▲ buttons, data dial or [–/+] buttons.

➔The selected song number, name, current tempo and the file icon

which indicates the type of the file are displayed.

• Song numbers 1 - 60 are displayed,

including song numbers that contain

no song data. However, no song

names are displayed for song numbers

that contain no data.

Select “ALL” if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order.

Select “RANDOM” if you want all songs on the disk to be played at

random. For either selection “ALL” or “RANDOM” the songs will be

repeated until playback is stopped.

● File Icons

There are four icons (shown below) that indicate the type of the file.

• Refer to the section “MIDI and Data

Compatibility” (page 8 in the Refer-

ence Manual) for information on file

formats.

• Icons are not shown for song data file

recorded with other CVP models,

excepting the CVP-98/96 and CVP-

94/92.

Song Playback

/ XG/SMF format file

/ DOC/ESEQ format file

/ Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft or XG/ESEQ file

/ Song data recorded with the CVP-98/96

File icon

Tempo

Current voice for the keyboard

Selected song

number/name

Use the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to call up the SONG PLAY [LIST]

display (display page 3), to view the entire list of the song names in the

disk. The desired song can be selected easily by using the left/right

LCD buttons, data dial, or [–/+] buttons. You can also select the song

by pressing the SONG ▼ ▲ buttons. Up to ten song titles are shown in

the display at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next ten titles

will appear when you scroll past the last title shown in the display.

When nothing appears in the song name

location...

• This indicates that there is no song data

for this song number.

Repeat Playback from Specific Songs

• If you first select

ALL

in the SONG PLAY

[MAIN] display, and then select a song in

the SONG PLAY [LIST] display (display

page 3), all songs will be repeatedly

played back starting from the selected

song.

Repeat Playback of a Single Song

• If you select a song in the SONG PLAY

[MAIN] display or in the SONG PLAY

[LIST] display (display page 3), and then

select the

1 SONG

in the SONG PLAY

REPEAT

display (display page 4), only

the selected song will be played back

repeatedly until stopped.

CStart and stop playback.........................................................................

Start playback of the selected song by pressing the panel [PLAY/

STOP] button.

➔Playback of the selected song starts. Unless ALL or RANDOM

is selected, the selected song will play through to the end and

playback will stop automatically. The current measure number

and tempo will be shown in the display during playback.

You can also start playback of the selected song by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

Press the panel [PLAY/STOP] button to stop playback.

➔Song playback stops.

You can also stop playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

You can exit from the song play mode by pressing the [SONG]

button. The lamp turns off and the previous display appears.

Voice Selection During Playback

• The voice you play from the keyboard

can be changed during song playback by

selecting a voice in the normal way (page

27). The voices of the 1/RIGHT & 2/

LEFT part being played back can be

changed in the SONG PLAY [PART]

display (page 92).

• Please note that the song may not start

immediately after pressing [PLAY/STOP].

Turning off the Keyboard Guide Lamp

• The keyboard guide lamps correspond-

ing to the keys being played by the 1/

RIGHT and 2/LEFT part will light in real

time. These guide lamps can be turned

off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]

display (display page 5). (See page 103.)

Turning Off the Lyric Display

• The lyrics are shown in the display when

playing back software which contains

lyric data. If you want to stop the lyrics

from appearing, you can disable the

function from display page 5 of the

SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display.

Using the Pedal to Start/Stop Playback

• By setting the Left Pedal Function to

START/STOP

in the FUNCTION [PEDAL]

display (display page 3), the left pedal

can function the same as the [START/

STOP] button. (See page 133.)

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

Song Playback

DISK IN USE

● Adjusting the Tempo

The playback tempo of the song can be changed freely as desired.

(See page 49.) The preset tempo for the selected song can be restored at

any time by simultaneously pressing the TEMPO [–/+] buttons.

Usually the tempo is indicated by numbers. However in case of the

free tempo software, “- - -” will appear in place of the tempo on the

display, and the measure numbers shown on the display will not corre-

spond to the actual measure; this only serves as a reference as to much of

the song has been played back. The increase or decrease of the tempo

based on the basic tempo is indicated by a percentage figure in the dis-

play when the tempo is changed (from -99 to +99 at maximum; the range

differs depending on the software).

• The beat lamp may not flash for

songs not having rhythm.

• With some songs, the displayed

measure numbers may not match

those marked on the score.

• Make sure not to take out the disk

while the DISK IN USE lamp is lit or

while a song is being played back.

Volume Adjustment for Each Part

• The volume of each Part can be ad-

justed in the MIXER display.

Adjusting the Level Balance of Song

Playback and the Keyboard Voices

• Use the [ACMP/SONG VOLUME]

control (page 17) to adjust the volume.

• When playing back a song recorded

with the Auto Accompaniment function,

Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned

on by pressing the [ACMP ON] button.

VEject the disk.........................................................................................................

When you’ve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the

disk drive’s EJECT button to remove it.

➔The LCD display returns to the main display.

Song Playback

RESET

TEMPO

Part Cancel

The 1/RIGHT (right hand), 2/LEFT (left hand) and ORCH (accom-

paniment) buttons in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display can be used to

turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are high-

lighted when the parts are turned on. For example, you can turn off the

right- and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard.

• Part ON/OFF can be switched during

playback.

• Parts not having any data cannot be

turned on. [This applies when there is

actually no data in the assigned track

(page 92), or when the assigned track

is set to “TRK - - (OFF).”]

The track assignment for each button can be changed in display page

6 of the SONG PLAY [PART] display (page 92).

• In the case of Yamaha Disklavier

PianoSoft files, DOC files and XG/

ESEQ files, the part indication does

not appear for the parts without data.

■Turning Individual Accompaniment Parts On

or Off

Normally, pressing the ORCH (accompaniment) LCD button turns all

orchestra parts (tracks 3 — 16) — or all parts other than 1/RIGHT and 2/

LEFT — on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on or off

individually from the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (display

page 2).

• All track numbers appear whether the

tracks contain data or not when a

Standard MIDI file song is selected

(excepting songs recorded on the

CVP-98/96/94/92).

ZSelect the SONG PLAY TRACK PLAY page. .........................

Use the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to select the SONG PLAY [TRACK

PLAY] display (display page 2).

➔Tracks which contain data are indicated above TRACK < / >.

Tracks enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding

the track number. Tracks which do not contain data are not dis-

played.

Song Playback

In this example, 1/RIGHT is cancelled.

XSelect the desired track for playback

(PLAY/OFF, SOLO). .........................................................................................

Select the track by using TRACK < or >, or the data dial, or the [–/

+] buttons.

➔The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Select playback or off for the selected track by pressing one of the far

right LCD buttons PLAY (playback) or OFF.

When a track is muted, the track number is “ghosted” (shown in lighter

indication) in the display. The voice used by the currently selected track

is shown above PLAY/OFF.

Select a track, then press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear

only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to cancel the

Solo function.

Assignment of Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT, and Voice Assignment

■ Assigning Tracks to 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT ............................

Specific tracks can be assigned to the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT in the

SONG PLAY [MAIN] display, allowing you to selectively turn playback

of assigned tracks on or off. TRACK - - (OFF) can be assigned to 2/

LEFT. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts.

• The track assignments of DOC files

and Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft files

are fixed, and therefore cannot be

changed.

Select the SONG PLAY [PART] display (display page 6) by using the

PAGE [<] [>] buttons.

➾Press the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT button to highlight the section in

the display, then use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to assign the

desired track.

You can also select the track by pressing the 1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT

button.

• Tracks cannot be assigned during

playback.

Song Playback

■ Selecting Voices for 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT Parts ..............

The playback voices for the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts can be se-

lected in the SONG PLAY [PART] display.

Press PART1,2 VOICE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corresponding sec-

tion of the display, then select the playback voice for 1/RIGHT and 2/

LEFT parts by using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

Or you can also select it by using the PART1,2 VOICE ▼ or ▲.

Overall Song Playback Volume Control

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] button can be used to control the

overall volume of song playback.

• If Auto Accompaniment is turned on

during the playback of an original song

that was recorded without Auto Ac-

companiment, the [ACMP/SONG

VOLUME] control will affect the level of

the Auto Accompaniment rather than

that of song playback. However, Auto

Accompaniment cannot be turned on

when playing back data transformed

with the Transform function (page

142).

• The Auto Accompaniment function

cannot be used when playing back

commercially available disk software or

songs recorded with Auto Accompani-

ment.

About Track Assignments

• Basic setting: Differs depending on

the file type (The [2/LEFT] parameter

may sometimes be set to “TRK - -

(OFF).”)

• The playback voice cannot be as-

signed during playback.

Song Playback

VOLUME

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

● When Playing Back XG/SMF Files or Original Song Data

PART1 Part 1

PART2 Part 2

OTHER Parts 3 — 8, 11 — 16

RHYTHM Parts 9 and 10

KBD Volume of your keyboard performance

● When Playing Back DOC Files

L&R Right- and left-hand parts (piano part)

BASS Bass part

ORCH Orchestra part

RHYTHM Rhythm part

KBD Volume of your keyboard performance

Individual Part Volume Control

To adjust the playback volume of individual parts, press the

[MIXER] button while in the Song Play mode to call up the MIXER

display. The display corresponding to the software being played back

appears in display page 1, and you can control the volume balance of the

keyboard sound and the orchestra accompaniment. Each track can be

adjusted in display page 2.

■Page 1............................................................................................................................

Press one of the LCD buttons to highlight the desired parameter, then

use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to adjust the volume of each part.

Several parts can be selected at once by simultaneously pressing the

corresponding LCD buttons. The volume of all selected parts can then

be adjusted together. Values can be adjusted in two-unit steps.

Song Playback

SONG MIXER FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

● When Playing Back XG/ESEQ Files

L&R Right- and left-hand parts (piano part)

ORCH Accompaniment part

KBD Volume of your keyboard performance

● When Playing Back Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft Files

L&R Right- and left-hand parts (piano part)

KBD Volume of your keyboard performance

■Page 2............................................................................................................................

Use the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to call up display page 2 of the

TRACK MIXER display so that all sixteen tracks appear. From this

page you can change the volume, voice, Reverb Depth, etc.

The parameters below can be changed. See the indicated reference

pages for each parameter.

Available parameters in the TRACK MIXER display

Song Playback

• The parameters Program Change

Number (

PRG#

), Bank LSB (

BNK

LSB

), and Bank MSB (

BNK MSB

which are used to select voices via

MIDI, are displayed when VOICE is

selected.

● When track 1 — 16 is selected:

• VOLUME (See page 94.)

• VOICE (See page 27.)

• PAN (See page 132.)

• REVERB DEPTH (See page 43.)

• EFFECT DEPTH (See page 46.)

● When TTL (Total) is selected:

• TEMPO (See page 49.)

• REVERB TYPE (See page 41.)

• REVERB DEPTH (See page 42.)

• EFFECT TYPE (See page 46.)

• Depending on the file type, some

parameters cannot be changed. For

such parameters, a “Fixed” indication

is shown.

Changing Settings in the TRACK MIXER Display

ZSelect the track to be changed. ........................................................

Select the desired track by pressing TRACK < or >. Selecting TTL

(Total) will change the overall settings of the song rather than the set-

tings of individual tracks.

Press the far right LCD button to select PLAY (playback), OFF, or

SOLO for the selected track. Select SOLO if you want to play only the

selected track.

XSelect the parameter to be edited..................................................

Press SELECT ▼ or ▲ to select the desired parameter.

• Depending on the file type, voice

changes may only be possible for

tracks 1 and 2.

CEdit the value or setting. ..........................................................................

Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to change the value or setting. You

can make changes to the parameters while the song is playing back, let-

ting you immediately hear the results of your edits.

• Selecting

TTL

and changing the RE-

VERB DEPTH value will also affect the

sound of your keyboard performance.

• The voices of tracks to which data of

Auto Accompaniment, rhythm and/or

harmony have been recorded can also

be changed.

• Volume range: 0 — 100

• One EFFECT TYPE can be set to a

single song.

If another song is selected, all settings

will return to the basic settings for the

song (or the settings used for record-

ing the song).

• If Auto Accompaniment is turned on

during playback of an original song

that was recorded without the Auto

Accompaniment function, the MIXER

display will function as Auto Accompa-

niment Part Volume Control instead of

Song Track Volume Control.

Song Playback

Selected track is

highlighted.

Current value of the selected track

Selected pa-

rameter to be

edited

Repeat Functions

The CVP-98/96 has convenient repeat functions that let you repeated

play back the same song or sections within the song. This function is

useful if you want to practice a difficult phrase repeatedly.

Select the desired mode from the available four Repeat modes from

the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (display page 4).

Four Repeat modes

• OFF (Repeat function is turned off)

• PHRASE (Phrase Repeat)

• 1 SONG (1 Song Repeat)

• AB mode (AB Repeat)

• The

ALL

RANDOM

playback mode

(in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display)

will be disengaged when any of the

Repeat modes are selected.

• Any previously set Repeat mode will

be reset to OFF when a different song

is selected.

■Phrase Repeat (DOC files only) ........................................................

For commercially available DOC files, you can select specific phrase

numbers (as indicated on the accompanying sheet music) and repeatedly

practice only the selected phrase. (Phrase Repeat can be used for the

four songs for which notation is provided in the included Music Book.)

If you select PHRASE by using the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ buttons,

the PHRASE display for selection of the phrase number will appear at

the right of the button. Press PHRASE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the corre-

sponding section of the display, then select the phrase number by using

the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

You can also select the phrase number by pressing PHRASE ▼ or ▲.

Once song playback is started, the selected phrase will be played back

repeatedly until playback is stoppped.

• Parts can be turned on/off even during

the performance.

• The Guide function can also be used

simultaneously with Phrase Repeat.

• When Phrase Repeat is started, a

lead-in count automatically plays be-

fore the phrase. However, for free-

tempo songs, a lead-in count is not

available.

Song Playback

■AB Repeat.................................................................................................................

This function allows you to specify any section (between point A and

point B) of a song, letting you repeatedly play back the selected section

for practice.

When AB mode is selected by the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲ but-

tons, A ➔ and B will appear at the right of the buttons in the display to

specify points A and B.

While the song is playing back, press the A ➔ button once at the be-

ginning of the section to be repeated.

➾Then, press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated.

Repeat playback of the specified section (from point A to point B)

will begin automatically.

The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song or

a different Repeat mode is selected. The same section can be played

back repeatedly as many times as you desire by using the [PLAY/STOP]

button.

• The specified A — B points will be

erased when a new song number or

another Repeat mode is selected.

• A lead-in count automatically plays

before the specified section A — B

Repeat playback is started. However,

for free-tempo songs, a lead-in count is

not available.

• To specify the A point as the beginning

of the song, press

➔

before play-

back starts. In this case a lead-in

count is not available.

• When both the A and B points are

specified, pressing the

button clears

only the B point, resulting in repeat

playback between the A point and the

end of the song.

• When both the A and B points are

specified, pressing the

➔

button

clears both A and B points, allowing

you to specify other A and B points

within the song.

• The B point cannot be selected unless

an A point is selected.

Song Playback

■1 Song Repeat......................................................................................................

When 1 SONG is selected by pressing the REPEAT MODE ▼ or ▲

button, any song selected and played as described above will play repeat-

edly until stopped.

• Lead-in count is not played.

Other Playback Controls

Pause

Press the [PAUSE] button during song playback to temporarily stop song

playback. Press [PAUSE] again or the [PLAY/STOP] button to resume

playback from the same point.

Rewind and Fast Forward

Use the [REW] and [FF] buttons to rewind or fast forward to the play-

back point of the song.

• While playback is stopped or paused, the [REW] and [FF] buttons can be

used to step backward or forward through the song a measure at a time.

Holding down either button continuously moves through the song in the

corresponding direction.

• During playback, the [REW] and [FF] buttons allow you to move the

playback point of the song rapidly as long as the button is held. No

sound is produced during [REW] operation.

• Using the [REW] button may

cause the voice, tempo, and/or

volume to change.

Playing Other Types of Music Data

■About Compatible Software..................................................................

The CVP-98/96 can playback the following types of software.

• Sequence formats: SMF (format 0 and 1), ESEQ

• Voice allocation formats: GM System Level 1, XG, DOC

Refer to the section “MIDI and Data Compatibility” (page 8 in the Refer-

ence Manual) for information on the voice allocation formats and sequence

formats.

The internal tone generator of the CVP-98/96 automatically resets for

compatibility with song data of the Yamaha XG format (including GM Sys-

tem Level 1) (page 8 in the Reference Manual) or of Yamaha DOC voice

allocation (page 8 in the Reference Manual), depending on the playback

data. (However, the selected voice allocation on the panel will not change.)

■Song Data Recorded on Other Instruments........................

Song data recorded on other Clavinovas (CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/

87A/59S/69A/69/79A/89/92/94 and CLP-705) will normally be played back

with the correct voices even though the volume balance may be slightly

different. However, data recorded using the Auto Accompaniment function

of the CVP-50/70 cannot be played back properly.

Song data recorded on the Yamaha Disklavier can also be played back.

• Regardless of the type of soft-

ware, only the following disk

formats can be used: 3.5” 2DD

720 kilobyte format and 3.5” 2HD

1.44 megabyte format.

Song Playback

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

100

Guide Control

The CVP-98/96 has a special Guide function which allows you to

practice by using the appropriate disk software. The “piano roll”

display and the keyboard guide lamp indicate which keys you

should play, and when you should play them. You can even

practice at your own pace since the CVP-98/96 pauses playback

of the accompaniment until you play the correct keys.

The Guide function can also be used during playback of the “4.

GUIDE Demo” song in the Demo mode. Press one of the GUIDE

CONTROL buttons during playback of the “4. GUIDE Demo” song

in the Demo mode, and use the Guide function to play the melody

part.

Guide Methods and Piano Roll

The CVP-98/96 has three different Guide methods that can be se-

lected depending on your playing experience or preferences. Beginning

players should practice first with Easy Play, then go on to Next Note,

then Sound Repeat.

■Practicing the Timing: Easy Play ....................................................

Since the Easy Play method lets you practice only the timing of the

notes, you can play anywhere on the keyboard. The melody will play

back smoothly when you play with the correct timing. (The accompani-

ment plays back normally in tempo.)

■Practicing the Notes: Next Note .......................................................

The Next Note method lets you check which notes to play by looking

at the piano roll display and the keyboard guide lamps. Since the CVP-

98/96 waits to play the accompaniment until you play the correct note,

you can practice at your own pace.

The keyboard guide lamps indicate the timing in which to play, by

changing from lit-up to flashing.

When the keyboard guide lamps do

not flash...

• The guide lamps may not flash in the

case of a few songs because of a

special guide system. In case of such

songs, however, you can switch to the

Next Note method so that the lamps

flash, if you like. See the “Other

Guide-related Functions” on page 103.

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PL AY NEX T NO T E

SOUN D

REPEAT

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PL AY NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

101

Guide Control

■Practicing Phrase-by-phrase with the Playback:

Sound Repeat .......................................................................................................

In the Sound Repeat method, the CVP-98/96 plays back a short

phrase. Listen to the phrase and practice.

Playback of one phrase repeats three times, then is followed automati-

cally by the next phrase.

Number of Repeats

• You can set the number of times the

phrase will be repeated from the

SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display

(display page 5). (See page 104.)

• The keyboard guide lamps can be

turned on or off as desired.

● Piano Roll

To show the piano roll in the display, press any GUIDE CONTROL

button, then press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback. A bar of

the same length as the note to be played scrolls down from the top of the

display toward the bottom. You should play the note at the time the bar

reaches the bottom of the display. In order to play the note with the cor-

rect duration, hold the note for as long as the bar remains in the display.

ZSet up the desired song for practicing.....................................

Check that the disk is properly inserted in the disk drive before call-

ing up the Guide function.

➾Select the song and cancel the part that you wish to practice your-

self from the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (display page 1).

Using the Guide Function

Before Practicing

• Before starting to practice, playback

the entire song without cancelling the

part to be practiced and listen to it

carefully. This will give you a clear

idea of how the song should be played,

and will make your practice sessions

progress more smoothly.

Auto Part Cancel

• If you turn on the Guide function with-

out cancelling playback of the part to

be practiced, 1/RIGHT part is guided

(or the 2/LEFT part is guided when the

1/RIGHT part contains no data). How-

ever, when you cancel the part before

turning on Guide, the setting will be

kept until the song is changed.

Piano Roll On/Off

• The piano roll display can be turned

on or off from the SONG PLAY

[GUIDE MODE] display (display page

5). (See page 104.)

102

XSelect the Guide method. ........................................................................

Press one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons: [EASY PLAY],

[NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT].

➔The lamp of the corresponding button lights.

Turning Off the Keyboard Guide

Lamps

• The keyboard guide lamp can be

turned on and off in the SONG PLAY

[GUIDE MODE] display. (See page

104.)

When the GUIDE CONTROL buttons

cannot be turned on...

• The GUIDE CONTROL buttons can be

used only in the Song Play mode or

when the “4. GUIDE Demo” song is

selected in the Demo mode. Only one

Guide mode can be selected at a time.

CPractice the part................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button to start playback.

➔The piano roll will appear. Practice along with the accompani-

ment.

Piano Roll On/Off

• The piano roll display can be turned on

or off from the SONG PLAY [GUIDE

MODE] display (display page 5). (See

page 104.)

• The correct melody plays back no

matter which note you play in the

EASY PLAY mode.

The Guide method can be changed

during playback.

• (However, the Guide mode cannot be

changed for songs in which

SPECIAL

is indicated in the GUIDE MODE loca-

tion in SONG PLAY [GUIDE MODE]

display page 5.)

• The [PAUSE] button cannot be used in

the Next Note or Sound Repeat meth-

ods.

VStop your practice session. ..................................................................

The Guide function stops automatically when playback reaches the

end of the song. You can also stop song playback by pressing the

[PLAY/STOP] button.

To turn off the Guide function, press the appropriate button —

[EASY PLAY], [NEXT NOTE] or [SOUND REPEAT] — so that the

lamp turns off.

• The keyboard guide lamps light corre-

sponding to the notes played by the 1/

RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts during song

playback, even when Guide is set to

off — unless the

LAMP

button is

turned off in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE

MODE] display. The guide lamps

indicate the notes to be played by both

the 1/RIGHT and 2/LEFT parts when

both are turned on or off; when only

one of the parts is turned off, the lamps

indicate the notes to be played by the

part that is turned off.

• The guide part can be selected, the

guide lamps can be turned on and off,

and the Guide function itself can be

turned on or off during playback.

Guide Control

GUIDE CONTROL

EASY PL AY NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

103

• Playback tempo can be set to any

desired value after a song has been

selected by using the TEMPO [–/+]

buttons.

• The positions of the guide lamps will

not change, even if the Transpose

function (page 130) is used to trans-

pose the pitch of the keyboard.

• The Guide function may not work

properly with software which was not

produced for independent left- and

right-hand playback.

• Since the Guide phrases used in the

Sound Repeat method are automati-

cally determined by the CVP-98/96,

they may not precisely match the

actual musical phrases. Also, the

phrases may become shorter when the

Guide function is used for both the left-

and right-hand parts.

Other Guide-related Functions

Various settings related to the Guide functions can be made in the SONG

PLAY [GUIDE MODE] display (display page 5).

• The settings made in this display will

also be effective in the Guide function

during playback of the “4. GUIDE

Demo” song in the Demo mode.

■GUIDE MODE ..........................................................................................................

NORMAL is ususally displayed in the location of the GUIDE MODE.

Change the indication to ENSEMBLE by pressing the GUIDE MODE

button; the part which was set to Part Cancel in the SONG PLAY

[MAIN] display (display page 1) can then be played with the regular Part

Cancel function and the other part (not set to Part Cancel) can be played

with the Easy Play function.

• The ENSEMBLE mode is effective only

for songs which have data in both the

[1/RIGHT] and [2/LEFT] parts.

• The

ENSEMBLE

mode cannot be

used when Next Note or Sound Re-

peat is selected.

When Next Note is selected and SPECIAL is indicated in the GUIDE

MODE display, a special Guide method is engaged for the selected song.

To return the normal Next Note mode, press the GUIDE MODE button

so that the indication chages to NORMAL.

• The

SPECIAL

indication appears

automatically depending on the song

being played back. The

SPECIAL

indication will not appear, even when

pressing the

GUIDE MODE

button,

when playing back songs that do not

feature the special method.

• When using the Easy Play or Sound

Repeat method, the respective method

is still active, even if the

SPECIAL

indication is shown.

Guide Modes

• Settings: NORMAL/ENSEMBLE/

(SPECIAL)

• Basic setting: Auto indication of NOR-

MAL/(SPECIAL)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Guide Control

104

■Setting the Sound Repeat Number................................................

To set the number of times the phrase is repeated in the Sound Repeat

mode, press the SOUND REPEAT button. When AUTO is selected, only

the notes which have not been played correctly are repeated; the Guide

function will automatically go on to the next phrase once the previous

one has been played properly.

Sound Repeat Number

• Settings: AUTO, 2 - 10

• Basic setting: 3

• Backup of last settings: OFF

■Lyric Display ON/OFF ..................................................................................

To turn lyric display off, press the LYRICS button to set the function

to OFF.

Piano Roll

• Settings: AUTO/ON/OFF

• Basic setting: AUTO

• Backup of last settings: OFF

■Keyboard Guide Lamp ON/OFF ........................................................

To turn off the keyboard guide lamps, press the LAMP button to set

the function to OFF.

Guide Control

■Setting the Piano Roll Indication.....................................................

The piano roll settings AUTO/ON/OFF can be changed by pressing

the PIANO ROLL button. When AUTO is selected, the piano roll will

appear by turning on one of the GUIDE CONTROL buttons. When this

is set to ON, the piano roll is always shown during playback; when set to

OFF, the piano roll is not displayed.

Lyric Display

• Setting: ON/OFF

• Basic setting: ON

• Backup of last settings: OFF

105

Song Recording

The CVP-98/96 features comprehensive song recording functions

that allow you to record your own performances to floppy disks.

Three recording methods are available: Quick Recording (page

107), which lets you record quickly and easily; Track Recording

(page 110), with which you can record multiple instrumental parts;

and Chord Sequence (page 116), which lets you step-record Auto

Accompaniment chords.

The music you create by recording is called a song. Up to

approximately 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depend-

ing on the amount of data contained in each song. Before you can

record, however, you must “format” a new disk. (See page 106).

● Structure of a Song

A song can be made up of several instrumental parts, each assigned to

a different track, as shown in the example below.

Various confirmation, alert, and error messages may appear in the

display during operation. Refer to the “Messages” section (page 2 in the

Reference Manual) for information on the messages.

• Refer to “Handling Floppy Disks”

(page 7) for information on using

floppy disks.

• Songs recorded by the CVP-98/96

are saved as XG/SMF (format 0)

files. See page 8 in the Reference

Manual for information on the XG/

SMF (format 0) format.

• Recorded song data is not output

through the MIDI OUT terminal when

played back.

Track 1 Piano Part (right-hand)

Track 2 Piano Part (left-hand)

Track 3 Bass Part

Track 4 Strings Part

Track 9 Rhythm Part

Track 10 Rhythm Part

Track 16 Organ Part

(Up to a maximum of 16 tracks.)

Song Recording track chart

VOLUME

STYLE

START

STOP

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SONG CONTROL

GUIDE CONTROL

MASTER

VOLUME

ACMP

SONG

VOLUME

MAX

MIN

MAX

DEMO POP

BALL–

ROOM

LATIN

POP

TRADI–

TIONAL

16BEAT ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

DANCE

POP

HELP

PIANIST

INTRO MAIN A MAIN B ENDING TAP SYNCHRO START

STOP

FADE

OUT

AUTO FILL

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

COUNTRY WALTZ D ISK

CUSTOM METRONOME

PAGE

RESET

TEMPO

BEAT

CONTRAST

POWER

BASS

ACMP ON

VIRTUAL

ARRANGER

MIN EXIT DISPLAY HOLD

PAUSE REW

EASY PLAY

SONG MIXER PIANO E. PIANO VIBES GUITAR ORGAN

XGDRUMSBASSBRASS

DUAL SPLIT REVERB EFFECT

STRINGS

CHOIR

SAX

FLUTE

DISK IN USE

CLAVI. TONE

SYNTH

FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

NEXT NOTE

SOUND

REPEAT

FF REC 1234

BANK

MEMORY

FREEZE

PLAY

STOP

VOICE

REGISTRATION

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

106

DISK IN USE

Recording Setup: Disk Format

Before you can record to the included blank disk, you will have to

format it. Commercially available blank disks must also be formatted

before using. Refer to Format in the Function section (page 135) to re-

format floppy disks that have already been used for recording.

• The same display appears when in-

serting blank unformatted disks, or

disks of different formats.

Format Types

• 2DD disks are formatted to 720 KB,

while 2HD disks are formatted to 1.44

MB.

ZInsert a disk............................................................................................................

Gently insert the included blank disk for recording into the disk drive

face up as shown in the illustration until it clicks into place.

➔A few seconds after inserting the disk into the disk drive, a “Start

disk format?” message appears in the display. To start formatting,

press the OK button. To cancel the format operation, press CAN-

CEL.

XExecute the format operation.............................................................

An “Are you sure?” message appears in the LCD display; press YES

to execute the operation, or NO button to cancel it.

A bar graph appears in the LCD display during formatting to indicate

progress of the operation. The display automatically returns to the previ-

ous display when formatting is completed.

Song Recording

Shutter

Label side of disk

107

Quick Recording

ZInsert a formatted disk. ..............................................................................

Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” posi-

tion, then insert the disk face up with the shutter forward until it clicks

into place.

➔The DISK IN USE lamp stays lit until the CVP-98/96 reads and

recognizes the disk. If the Song Play mode is not automatically

called up, press the [SONG] button.

➔The lamp lights and the SONG PLAY MAIN display appears. If

the SONG PLAY MAIN display is not shown, use the PAGE [<]

[>] buttons to select display page 1.

• The SONG PLAY mode will not auto-

matically be called up, even after

inserting the disk, in disk-related Func-

tion operations and the CUSTOM

STYLE display.

Using Style File Disks

• When using Style File disks, first load

the desired data from the Style File

disk (page 80), then insert the record-

ing disk.

XSelect the song number to be recorded. ................................

Select the desired song number for recording by using the SONG ▼

or ▲ buttons, data dial or [–/+] buttons.

The song number can be selected from between 1 and 60. The selected

number becomes the location that the song will be recorded. If a song

name appears beside the song number, the selected song already contains

data, and another song number must be selected.

Song Recording

Write protect tab closed

(unlocked — write enabled)

DISK IN USE

Shutter

Label side of disk

108

CSelect the record mode. ...............................................................

Press the [REC] button.

➔The [REC] lamp lights and the QUICK RECORD display of

record mode page 1 appears.

Call up page 1 by using the PAGE [<] [>] buttons if the lamp

is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not shown.

• The song number for recording can be

changed in the QUICK RECORD display.

• If Auto Accompaniment is turned on when

entering the record mode, the

ACMP

RHY

track will automatically change to the

REC

display.

VSelect the part for recording. .................................................

In Quick Recording, three parts can be recorded: the right hand

part (1/RIGHT), the left hand part (2/LEFT) and the Auto Accom-

paniment & rhythm part (ACMP &RHY). Press the appropriate

button — 1/RIGHT, 2/LEFT or ACMP&RHY — to set the part

to REC (record enable) or OFF (record/playback disabled). The

PLAY (playback) setting can be selected only for parts which al-

ready contain data.

The ACMP&RHY part can automatically be set to REC by

pressing the panel [ACMP ON] button. To record only the

rhythm, leave ACMP&RHY set to REC, then press the [ACMP

ON] button so that the lamp goes out.

• Both

1/RIGHT

and

2/LEFT

cannot be set to

REC

at the same time.

Tracks Recorded with Harmony, Dual or Split

Functions

• You can record your performance with har-

mony parts using the Harmony function, or

record two different parts by using the Dual or

Split functions. Harmony is recorded to tracks

6, 7 and 8. When using Dual with recording of

the 1/RIGHT part, data is recorded to tracks 1

and 3; when using Split with recording of the 1/

RIGHT part, data is recorded to tracks 1 and 5.

When using Dual with the 2/LEFT part, data is

recorded to tracks 2 and 4; when using Split

with the 2/LEFT part, data is recorded to tracks

2 and 5.

Tracks Recorded Using Auto Accompaniment

• When recording Auto Accompaniment, the

rhythm is recorded to tracks 9 - 10, bass to

track 11, and chordal backing to tracks 12 - 16.

When a part is set to REC (record enable), recording is set to

stand-by and automatically starts when you play the keyboard.

• When the

ACMP

RHY

part is set to

REC

, the

metronome will sound to provide a timing guide

in the Synchronized Start mode before record-

ing is started. (The metronome doesn’t sound

when Synchronized Start is released.)

• The Chord Sequence recording method (page

116) lets you record Auto Accompaniment

without having to play chord parts in tempo.

Song Recording

• When any part is displayed in

REC

, the remain-

ing memory capacity of the disk (in kilobytes)

will appear directly below the measure indica-

tion in the display. Empty 2DD and 2HD disks

should have about 690KB and 1400KB, re-

spectively. This is room enough for about

50,000/100,000 notes if no other data is re-

corded.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

109

BSelect the desired voices and accompaniment

style, etc........................................................................................................

Select the voices and accompaniment style and set the tempo in

the normal way, and other settings needed. (If you want to try out

the selected voices, style and tempo, etc., make sure to do so be-

fore entering the SONG PLAY mode, since the recording will start

as soon as you play the keyboard or press the [START/STOP]

button.)

When Using Style File Disks

• When using Style File disks, make sure to load

the data from the Style File disk (page 80)

before inserting the disk for recording.

• The Auto Accompaniment functions — INTRO,

AUTO FILL, ENDING, and FADE IN/OUT —

can be also recorded. Press the INTRO button

before starting to record, press the AUTO FILL

button during recording, press the ENDING

button at the end of recording, and press the

FADE IN/OUT button at the beginning or end-

ing of the recording. When the ENDING button

or the FADE IN/OUT button is pressed at the

ending, recording stops automatically after

playing the ending pattern or fade out.

Recording Along with the Metronome

1. After selecting the voice, press the [METRO-

NOME] button, and set the Beat parameter in

the METRONOME display.

→

The metronome

will start sounding.

2. The recording starts as soon as you play the

keyboard. The metronome sound is not re-

corded.

When a disk is not inserted...

• A song can be recorded to internal memory if it

is short enough. A maximum of approximately

2500 notes

25KB

can be recorded; however,

this amount may be less if other functions are

used. The internally recorded song will be

deleted when the power is turned off or when

another song is loaded. See “Recording With-

out a Disk” (page 127) for more information.

Song Recording

NStart recording.......................................................................................

There are several ways to start recording, as described below.

• Recording your keyboard performance (1/RIGHT or

2/LEFT)

Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

• Recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm

(ACMP&RHY)

Start playing the keyboard (in the left range when the keyboard

is split) with the Synchronized Start function or press the

[START/STOP] button.

• Recording your keyboard performance together with

the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm

Start recording in the same way as described in “Recording the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm (ACMP&RHY)” above to

start recording your keyboard performance together with the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm.

• Recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm in the

middle of recording your keyboard performance

Start recording your keyboard performance as in “Recording

your keyboard performance (1/RIGHT or 2/LEFT)” above,

then start recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm while

you play as described in “Recording the Auto Accompaniment

or rhythm (ACMP&RHY)” above.

Adjusting the Volume During Recording

• During recording, you can adjust the volume of

the recorded Auto Accompaniment and/or

keyboard part from the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] control and the MIXER display. When

entering the record mode, [ACMP/SONG

VOLUME] is automatically reset to the default

value (MAX), regardless of the current slider

position.

Turning Harmony or Split On/Off During Re-

cording

• When recording the 1/RIGHT part, [HAR-

MONY] or [SPLIT] can be set to on and re-

corded for only this part. When the 2/LEFT

part is selected, the Harmony sound and the

left range of the split cannot be recorded.

When the recording part is changed, [HAR-

MONY] and [SPLIT] are automatically turned

off.

• The keyboard guide lamps do not light up

during recording.

110

MStop recording. ...................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔Recording stops. When the recorded data has been written to

disk, the [REC] lamp goes out and the song play display appears.

You can also stop recording by pressing the [REC] button.

When pressing the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording

your keyboard performance, without the Auto Accompaniment and

rhythm. Press either the [PLAY/STOP] or [REC] button in order to

actually stop recording.

<Play back the recording............................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔The recorded data will be played back. During playback you can

use the [REW], [FF] and [PAUSE] buttons to control the playback,

and use the TEMPO [–/+] buttons to change the tempo. You can

also play along on the keyboard.

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is

reached, or you can press the [PLAY/STOP] button again to stop it at

anytime.

• The CVP-98/96 may continue to write

data to the disk for a short time after

you stop recording. DO NOT eject the

disk while the DISK IN US

lamp of

the disk drive is lit.

• When a song has been recorded, a

temporary name

SONG ***

(*** is the

number) will automatically be given to

the song. You can change the name

as desired. (See page 120.)

• The [ACMP ON] and/or [HARMONY]

lamp(s) automatically go out when

recording of these parts has finished.

• When recording is finished, [ACMP/

SONG VOLUME] is automatically reset

to the default setting (MAX), regardless

of the current slider position.

ZSet up the instrument for recording............................................

The first three steps in the Track Recording process are exactly the

same as those for Quick Recording. (See page 107.)

Track Recording (Multi-track Recording)

XSelect the TRACK RECORD Page ..................................................

Use the PAGE [<] [>] buttons to select the TRACK RECORD page

(RECORD display page 2). Each track will be displayed in the TRACK

< > section. Tracks which are enabled for playback are indicated by a

box surrounding the track number, and tracks which are record-enabled

are indicated by highlighted number. Tracks which do not contain data

are not displayed.

Song Recording

• When the Rhythm track(s) contain

data, an “

” indication appears at the

right below “RHYTHM” in the display.

111

CSelect the desired track for recording. .....................................

Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [–/+] buttons

to select the track.

➔The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Use the LCD button at the far right to set the selected tracks to

RECORD (record enable) or OFF (record/playback disable). PLAY can

only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted,

the track number is “ghosted” (shown in lighter indication) in the dis-

play.

Song Recording

Three separate tracks can be set to record simultaneously when re-

cording keyboard parts.

If you intend to record using the Dual or Split functions, two tracks

must be record-enabled.

If you intend to use both the Dual and Split functions simultaneously,

three tracks must be selected.

If Auto Accompaniment and/or Harmony are turned on, the recording

track numbers are automatically fixed, as described below.

* If Auto Accomapniment is turned on, tracks 9 through 16 are auto-

matically record-enabled for recording the Auto Accompaniment

data. If the Harmony function is turned on, tracks 6 through 8 are

automatically record-enabled for recording the Harmony data.

When the RHYTHM button is pressed, tracks 9 and 10 are automati-

cally selected for the rhythm data. Set tracks 9 and 10 to RECORD,

PLAY, or OFF by using the LCD button at the far right.

• Track 10 (and 9, in some cases) can

only be used to record the rhythm

sound of the accompaniment style and

cannot be used to record keyboard

part. Also, the keyboard part should

be recorded on a track other than

those used for Harmony or Auto Ac-

companiment.

• When Auto Accompaniment is turned

on, Synchronized Start recording is

automatically set to stand-by.

• When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10)

are set to

RECORD

, the metronome will

sound to provide a timing guide in the

Synchronized Start mode.

112

BStart recording....................................................................................................

There are several ways to start recording, as described below.

• Recording your keyboard performance

Start playing the keyboard or press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

• Recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm

Start playing the keyboard (in the left range when the keyboard is

split) with the Synchronized Start function or press the [START/

STOP] button.

• Recording your keyboard performance together with the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm

Start recording in the same way as described in “Recording the Auto

Accompaniment or rhythm“ above to start recording your keyboard

performance together with the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm.

• Recording the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm in the mid-

dle of recording your keyboard performance

Start recording your keyboard performance as in “Recording your

keyboard performance” above, then start recording the Auto Accom-

paniment or rhythm while you play as described in “Recording the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm” above.

The current measure number is shown in the display as you record.

The parameters listed below will be recorded in addition to notes you

play. (Recorded parameters differ depending on the play styles and set-

tings.)

• If Auto Accompaniment and/or Har-

mony are already on when the Track

Recording page is selected, the corre-

sponding tracks are automatically

record-enabled and the Synchronized

Start mode is automatically turned on.

• If you want to re-record part of the

song (for example, if you’ve made a

mistake in the recording), you can

easily do so with the Punch-in /out

Recording function (page 113).

Backing Up Your Data

• Any time you have recorded some

amount of data, you should copy the

data to another song number for

backup purposes (see page 136 for

information on the Copy operation).

Doing this prevents accidental loss of

important data, should you inadvert-

ently delete the data during recording.

Parameters Recorded for Each Track

• Notes

• Voice

• Volume (initially maximum)

• Pan

• Damper pedal

• Soft pedal

• Sostenuto pedal

• Reverb depth

• Effect depth

• Individual part volume

• Fade-in/out (converted into volume data)

Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song

• Tempo

• Reverb type

• Reverb depth

• Effect type*

• Accompaniment style

• Intro

• Main A/B

• Fill-in

• Ending

* The last recorded track effect takes priority.

Other Recorded Parameters

Accompaniment style data which is recorded but not listed

above includes:

• Individual part volume

Song Recording

VSet all performance features as required..............................

After setting the tracks to be recorded, set up all necessary perform-

ance features as required: voice, accompaniment style, tempo, reverb,

etc.

113

NStop recording. ...................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔Recording stops. The [REC] lamp goes out when the data has

been written to the disk, and the song play display appears.

You can also stop recording by pressing the [REC] button.

When pressing the [START/STOP] button, only the recording of the

Auto Accompaniment or rhythm will stop. You can continue recording

your keyboard performance without the Auto Accompaniment or rhythm.

Press either the [PLAY/STOP] or [REC] button in order to actually stop

recording.

• When recording is finished, [ACMP/

SONG VOLUME] is automatically reset

to the default setting (MAX), regardless

of the current slider position.

Song Recording

Adding New Tracks

You can add a new track to your song by selecting a new record

track(s) and voice(s) for recording as described above. You can record

while playing back and monitoring the previously recorded tracks, letting

you assemble a complete song by repeating this process.

• If you record on a track that has al-

ready been recorded, the previous

material will be erased and the new

material will be recorded in its place.

Punch-in/out Recording

With the Punch-in/out Recording function, you can selectively re-

record specified sections of the song. Punch-in/out recording allows you

to start recording from any “Punch-in” point within a previously re-

corded track and stop recording at any “Punch-out” point, leaving intact

all recorded material up to the Punch-in point and following the Punch-

out point.

• Punch-in/out recording cannot be used

on tracks to which Auto Accompani-

ment, rhythm and/or Harmony are

recorded.

ZPlay back the song.........................................................................................

Play back the song in order to locate the point you want to Punch-in

(re-record) from .

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

114

XPause before the Punch-in point. ...................................................

Press the [PAUSE] button to pause play back a bit before the point at

which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before the

Punch-in point so you’ll be able to grasp the timing for the Punch in.

CTurn on the Punch-in/out function................................................

Press the [REC] button.

➔The PUNCH IN/OUT display appears.

VSelect a track. .......................................................................................................

Press the TRACK < or > buttons or use the data dial or [–/+] buttons

to select the track.

➔The selected track is indicated by an underline mark.

Use the LCD button at the far right to set the selected track to

RECORD (record enable) or OFF (record/playback disable). PLAY can

only be selected for tracks which contain data. When a track is muted,

the track number is “ghosted” (shown in lighter indication) in the dis-

play.

• Only tracks which allow Punch-in/out

Recording will appear and can be

selected. The rhythm, Auto Accompa-

niment and Harmony tracks cannot be

selected.

Auto Setting of Punch-in/out

• If no other track is selected, the last

recorded track is automatically se-

lected for Punch-in/out.

Song Recording

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

115

BSelect the Punch-in mode. .....................................................................

Select the desired Punch-in mode by using the LCD button located

second from the right. Two modes are available, as described below.

1ST KEY Recording begins as soon as the first key is played, after

Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).

PEDAL Recording begins as soon as the left pedal is pressed, after

Punch-in playback is started in step 7 (below).

• When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is

selected, the left pedal is automatically

assigned for this function only (the

normal pedal function is canceled).

NSelect the Punch-out mode. .................................................................

Select the desired Punch-out mode by using the center LCD button.

Two modes are available, as described below.

REPLACE When recording is stopped, all data following the stopped

point will be erased.

PNCH.OUT When recording is stopped, all data following the stopped

point will remain intact.

Song Recording

MStart playback and recording. ............................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE] button to start playback from

the current paused location.

To start Punch-in record when the 1ST KEY mode is selected, simply

begin playing at the point from which you want to record.

To start Punch-in record when the PEDAL mode is selected, press the

left pedal at the point from which you want to record.

• When the PEDAL Punch-in mode is

selected, recording can be started

directly by pressing the left pedal,

without having to start playback by

pressing the [PLAY/STOP] or [PAUSE]

button.

116

Chord Sequence

The Chord Sequence function allows you to enter Auto Accompani-

ment data step-by-step according to chord names, and lets you record the

accompaniment part without having to play the song in time with the

rhythm or at a certain tempo.

ZSet up the instrument for recording............................................

Just as you did in steps 1 through 3 of Quick Recording, insert a for-

matted disk, select a song number, then press the [REC] button to enter

the Record mode.

➾Select the RECORD [EDIT] display, page 3 of the Record mode,

by using the PAGE [<] [>] buttons.

● Set Up for Step Recording of the Data

You can enter the chords with the SINGLE FINGER, MULTI FIN-

GER, or FINGERED Auto Accompaniment modes, or by specifying the

chord name manually from the LCD display. If you wish to enter chords

with one of the Auto Accompaniment modes, select the desired mode at

this point.

Song Recording

• When the PEDAL mode is selected,

recording can also be stopped by

pressing the left pedal.

<Stop recording. ...................................................................................................

Press the [PLAY/STOP] button.

➔Recording stops. When the data has been written to disk, the

[REC] lamp goes out and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display ap-

pears.

You can also stop recording by pressing the [REC] button.

SONG CONTROL

PAUSE REW FF REC

PL AY

STOP

117

XTurn on the Chord Sequence function. .......................

Press the CHORD SEQ. button in the RECORD [EDIT] dis-

play.

➔The CHORD SEQUENCE display appears and Auto Ac-

companiment is turned on. If the Full Keyboard mode is

currently active, the Fingered Chord mode will be selected

instead.

Changing the Auto Accompaniment Mode

• Auto Accompaniment cannot be turned off

while the Chord Sequence function is active.

However, you can select from among the Multi

Finger, Fingered, and Single Finger Auto Ac-

companiment modes from the pop-up display

by pressing the [ACMP ON] button. The split

point can also be changed.

When Chord Sequence cannot be turned on...

• The chord sequence function cannot be used

when no disk has been inserted in the disk

drive.

• The Chord Sequence data will automatically

replace any previous data in the Auto Accom-

paniment and rhythm tracks that was recorded

in the Quick Record or Track Record modes.

• Up to 999 measures can be recorded using the

Chord Sequence function.

• The chord input resolution will be automatically

selected according to the current style. For

styles of 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/8, 9/8 and 12/8

time signatures, one chord can be entered on

every 8th note or 8th-note triplet. For other

time signatures, one chord can be entered for

each measure.

Entering Accompaniment Style and Section

Changes

• One style change or section change (page

118) can be made at the beginning of each

measure (The Intro pattern can only be en-

tered at the beginning of a song.). However,

Auto Fill data can be entered anywhere you

desire.

CMove the cursor to the entry point. .................................

The display shows measures as a horizontal line with 8th-note

divisions.

To move the triangular cursor along the measure indication to

the point at which you want to enter a chord or style change, press

one of the CURSOR < > buttons (the section is highlighted),

then use the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

You can also move the triangular cursor by pressing the CUR-

SOR < > buttons.

Adjusting the Volume of Auto Accompani-

ment

• You can also enter volume changes for the

Auto Accompaniment. Used judiciously, these

can help you create professional-sounding

dynamic changes in the Auto Accompaniment

of your song. To do this, first enter the Auto

Accompaniment part volume data from the

MIXER display; the volume event symbol ( )

will appear in the box in the middle of the

display. To actually record the volume data at

the current position, press the

SET

button in the

CHORD SEQUENCE display. (An initial vol-

ume event is automatically entered at the

beginning of a song.)

Song Recording

118

VEnter and set the chords and/or style changes. ............

To enter a chord, either play the chord with appropriate fingering on

the left range of the Auto Accompaniment section of the keyboard (lower

than the split point), or highlight ROOT or TYPE in the LCD display and

use the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

You can also select the chord by pressing the ROOT or TYPE button.

• The input chord name also appears in

the

ROOT

and

TYPE

sections of the

display when a chord is entered via the

keyboard.

➾To enter a style change (style, section and tempo) simply make

the appropriate selections in the normal way.

➾Once the chord and/or style has been selected, press the SET

button. The data is recorded to the current location, and a black

box and the recorded chord name appear in the measure indica-

tion. The cursor automatically moves to the next position.

The entered data of the recorded style will be shown in the display:

the time signature, the style name and section appear at the top of the

display, and the chord name and tempo in the box at the middle of the

display.

Continue moving the cursor to other positions and enter chords and

style changes in this manner. You can always check the entered data

during the operation by playing back the sequence using the [PLAY/

STOP] button.

The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below.

Data Recorded By the Chord Sequence Function

• Accompaniment style

• Section (MAIN A/B, Intro, Ending, Auto-fill, Fade-in/out, Break)

• Chord name

• Auto accompaniment part volume (MIXER settings)

• Tempo

• Rhythm on/off

• ACMP/SONG volume (as an initial setting only)

• SMALL ACMP

• VIRTUAL ARRANGER (one ON/OFF setting for an entire song only)

• Fade-out cannot be entered during

Fade-in.

Entering Rhythm-only Sections

• You can also record the rhythm alone

(without accompaniment) to your song.

To do this, record a blank chord in the

desired measure by leaving the

TYPE

parameter set to “ - - -”.

Entering a Break

• A complete break can be created by

setting the chord type to “ - - -” and

setting rhythm sound to “OFF” (see

“RHYTHM ON/OFF” below).

• The types of chords that can be en-

tered are the same as those listed for

the fingered mode (page 59). On-

bass chords can be entered via the

keyboard.

• The measure number is indicated at

the left of the measure indication.

• For information on other useful editing

features, see the section “Chord Se-

quence Page 2 Functions” below.

• The same chord, as set previously

(i.e., the same chord shown in the box

at the middle of the display), cannot be

entered even if the

SET

button is

pressed.

Song Recording

• The chord name is indicated only at

the first beat of the measure line, with

the exception of 4/4 and 12/8 time

signatures, for which indications ap-

pear at the first and third beats.

119

BStop recording. ...................................................................................................

When all recording has been finished, select page 2 of the CHORD

SEQUENCE display, then press the END MARK and SET buttons and

input an “end mark” which determines the location of the ending. The

end mark will be displayed in the box at the middle of the display.

• The chord sequence data now resides

in tracks 9 through 16, and can be

played back in the normal way. Add

other tracks as desired by using the

standard track selection and recording

procedure. You can also record over

the Auto Accompaniment parts and

replace them with original material if

you like by using the standard track

selection and record procedure.

• The song recorded via the Chord

Sequence function can be modified

later by re-entering the Chord Se-

quence mode and making the desired

changes. However, keep in mind that

any data recorded over the Auto Ac-

companiment parts (with normal track

recording) will be replaced by the

preset accompaniment style data. (For

example, even if you’ve recorded your

own bass part, it will be erased and

replaced by the original bass pattern if

you correct the data in the Chord

Sequence display.)

Page 2 of the CHORD SEQUENCE display contains a number of

versatile functions that help you enter chords more efficiently.

Finally, press the [REC] button and a “Save recorded data?” message

will appear. Press YES to store the recorded data and automatically

leave the Chord Sequence function; the display returns to the SONG

PLAY display. To leave without saving the data, press NO. To continue

editing the sequence without saving the data, press CANCEL.

Other Chord Sequence Functions

ALL DELETE

To delete all sequence data, press the ALL DELETE button. An “Are

you sure?” confirmation prompt appears. Press YES to execute the op-

eration, or NO to cancel.

DELETE

To delete the data at the current cursor location, press the DELETE

button. An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt appears. Press YES to

execute the operation, or NO to cancel.

Song Recording

End

mark

120

RHYTHM ON/OFF

To turn the rhythm sound on or off, press the RHYTHM ON/OFF

button followed by the SET button. No rhythm sound is produced fol-

lowing the location to which a “rhythm off” event is entered; the rhythm

starts sounding again from the location to which a “rhythm on” event is

entered.

• The rhythm on/off status can be

checked by mark in the box at the

middle of the display.

The Record mode also features a number of convenient edit functions

that provide even greater control over the song data. The Record Edit

functions include: Song Name, which lets you name a recorded song file;

Track Edit, which gives you a variety of track-related editing controls,

such as Track Mix and Track Delete; and Initial Edit, which lets you

change the data at the beginning of a song, such as voice, reverb, and

effect settings.

To select the Record Edit function, call up the RECORD [EDIT] dis-

play (Record display page 3) after selecting the song you wish to edit.

Song Recording

Record Edit Function

• The Record Edit functions can only be

used for song data recorded with the

CVP-98/96 (or 94/92).

End Mark

• Unless an end mark is entered, the

song will end one measure after the

last entered data. If an Ending pattern

or Fade-out is input, the song will end

at the last measure of the Ending or

Fade-out.

END MARK

To enter an “end mark” at the current cursor location, press the END

MARK button followed by the SET button. An end mark signifies the

end of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song.

(An end mark is unnecessary when ending with an Ending pattern or

Fade-out.) The cursor cannot be moved past an end mark. You can de-

lete an end mark by using the DELETE button, just as with other normal

data.

121

This function is used to name song files recorded with the CVP-98/96

or to change existing names. To call up the Song Name function, press

the SONG NAME button in the RECORD [EDIT] display.

Song Name

• The Song Name function cannot be

used when a disk has not been in-

serted in the disk drive.

Song Recording

ZEnter the desired name. ............................................................................

Use the CHAR > button to move the underline cursor to the desired

character position in the file name display. (File names can be up to 12

characters in length).

➾ Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select and highlight the char-

acter or mark you wish to enter.

Press the CHAR SET button to enter the selected character to the cur-

rent cursor position and move to the next position. Continue entering

other characters or marks in this way.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK

SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and

the cursor moves back to the deleted position.

To abort the Song Name operation and return to the RECORD EDIT

display, press the CANCEL button.

XRegister the name. ..........................................................................................

When the song file name is complete, press the OK button to register

it. The new name is registered as the current song file name. To cancel

the operation, press the CANCEL button.

To exit from the Song Name function, press the [REC] button (the lamp

goes out).

122

Press the TRACK EDIT button in the RECORD [EDIT] display to

call up the TRACK EDIT display. There are three pages in the TRACK

EDIT display: TRACK EDIT [MIX], TRACK EDIT [DELETE], and

TRACK EDIT [QUANTIZE].

Track Edit

Track Copy

• Only tracks containing data will appear

and can be selected for

TRACK A

and

TRACK B

. In addition, “- - -” (no track)

can also be selected for

TRACK B

. In

this case, the data of

TRACK A

will

simply be copied to

TRACK C

• For the Track Mix function, the se-

lected track voice and volume data,

etc. (i.e., all data except note data) of

TRACK A

will be effective for the track

after the mix operation.

■Track Mix — Track Edit Page 1

The Track Mix function combines the data from two specified tracks

and copies the result to a third specified track.

Song Recording

ZSpecify the two tracks to be mixed..............................................

Press the TRACK A and TRACK B buttons to highlight the param-

eters, and use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the two track num-

bers to be mixed. The voices which are used for the selected tracks are

indicated at the side of A:/B:, located at the left of the LCD display.

XSpecify the destination track. .............................................................

Use the TRACK C parameter to specify the track to which you want

to record the mixed data. You can also specify the track for the mixed

data by highlighting the appropriate section using the TRACK C button,

then using the data dial or [–/+] buttons.

Any previous data in the destination track will be erased.

CExecute the Track Mix operation. ...................................................

Press the MIX button to begin execution of the Track Mix operation.

An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to ex-

ecute the Track Mix operation or press NO to cancel.

When this is completed, the MIX button will change to UNDO, al-

lowing you to undo the Track Mix operation and restore the previous

data (before mixing).

Press the [REC] button (the lamp goes out) to exit the Track Mix

function.

You can also exit the Track Mix function by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

• The previous data of the mixed track

will remain even after executing Track

Mix. If the old data is not needed, you

should delete it. (See “Track Delete”

below.)

• A bar graph indicating the progress of

the Track Mix operation will appear

while the data is being processed.

• You can check if the results are as you

expected or not, by starting and stop-

ping playback with the [PLAY/STOP]

button before performing the

UNDO

operation.

• The Undo function cannot be used if

you’ve selected another track or exited

from this mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal RAM (see

page 127).

123

Song Recording

■Track Delete — Track Edit, Page 2

The Track Delete function can be used to delete the data from any

specified track.

ZSpecify the track to be deleted. ........................................................

Use the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the Track parameter, then

use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the track to be deleted.

• A bar graph indicating the progress of

the Track Delete operation will appear

while the data is being processed.

• You can check if the results are as you

expected or not, by starting and stop-

ping playback with the [PLAY/STOP]

button before performing the

UNDO

operation.

• The Undo function cannot be used if

you’ve selected another track or exited

from this mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal RAM (see

page 127).

XExecute the Delete operation..............................................................

Press the DELETE button. At the “Are You Sure?” confirmation

prompt, press YES to execute the Delete operation or NO to cancel.

The DELETE display will change to the UNDO display after the De-

lete operation is executed. If the result is not what you expected, press

the UNDO button to restore the data of the deleted track to what it was

before performing the Delete operation.

• Only tracks containing data will appear

and can be selected.

To exit the Track Delete function, press the [REC] button (the lamp

goes out).

You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Delete func-

tion.

■Track Quantize

You can “tighten up” the timing of a recorded part by aligning all

notes to specified beats with the Track Quantize function. For example,

you can accurately align the recorded notes to 8th- or 16th-note resolu-

tion.

124

XSpecify the quantize “size.”..................................................................

Press the LCD button below the note symbol to select the desired

quantize “size” as shown below.

CExecute the Quantize operation. .....................................................

Press the QUANTIZE button. At the “Are you sure?” confirmation

prompt, press the YES button to execute the Quantize operation or NO

button to cancel.

The QUANTIZE display will be changed to the UNDO display after

the Quantize operation is executed. If the result is not what you ex-

pected, press the UNDO button to restore the data of the quantized track

to what it was before performing the Quantize operation.

To exit the Track Quantize function, press the [REC] button (the

lamp goes out).

You can also press the [EXIT] button to exit the Track Quantize func-

tion.

• Only the note data and voice data are

quantized.

• A bar graph indicating the progress of

the Quantize operation will appear

while the data is being processed.

• You can check if the results are as you

expected or not, by starting and stop-

ping playback with the [PLAY/STOP]

button before performing the

UNDO

operation.

• The Undo function cannot be used if

you’ve changed the quantize “size,”

selected another track, or exited from

this mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal RAM (see

page 127).

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

Song Recording

ZSpecify the track to be quantized. .................................................

Use the TRACK ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the Track parameter, then

use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the track to be quantized.

• Only tracks containing data will appear

and can be selected.

Initial Edit (Changing the Initial Data)

The Initial Edit function allows you to change the volume level of

each track or the initial data set for the entire song after you’ve finished

recording. The INITIAL EDIT display appears when you press the

INITIAL EDIT button in the RECORD [EDIT] display. All sixteen

tracks are displayed simultaneously in this display and the settings such

as volume, voices and reverb depth can be changed.

• Any voice changes entered in the

middle of the original song will be

erased when the voice parameter is

changed in the Initial Edit mode.

• Depending on the data type, some

parameters cannot be changed. For

such parameters, a “Fixed” indication

is shown.

• For songs recorded to 1/RIGHT or 2/

LEFT of the copied DOC files, voice

changes can only be made to track 1

or 2.

125

Song Recording

The following parameters can be changed in the Initial Edit display.

Refer to the indicated page for details on each parameter.

Parameters which can be changed with Initial Edit:

● When [TTL] (Total) is selected

• Tempo (page 49)

• Reverb Type (page 41)

• Reverb Depth (page 42)

• Effect Type (page 46)

● When one of tracks 1 - 16 is selected

• Volume (page 94)

• Voice (page 27)

• Pan (page 132)

• Reverb Depth (page 43)

• Effect Depth (page 46)

• The parameters Program Change

Number (

PRG#

), Bank LSB (

BNK

LSB

), and Bank MSB (

BNK MSB

which are used to select voices via

MIDI, are also displayed when VOICE

is selected.

XSelect the parameters to be changed........................................

Select the parameters to be changed by pressing the SELECT ▼ or ▲

button.

Making Settings in the INITIAL EDIT Display

ZSelect the track to be edited. ...............................................................

Select the track whose parameters you wish to change by pressing the

TRACK < or > button. If TTL (Total) is selected, the setting change

will be made not for each track but for the entire song.

The selected track

is highlighted.

The current parameter

value of the selected track.

The selected pa-

rameters to be

changed.

126

CChange the settings......................................................................................

Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to change the settings. You can

instantly check the effect of the changes, since the settings can be

changed during playback.

• If [TTL] is selected and the value of the

reverb depth is changed, the new

setting will also affect the keyboard

sound.

• The voices of the tracks to which Auto

Accompaniment, rhythm and/or Har-

mony data have been recorded, can

also be changed.

• The volume parameter’s initial default

value is 100 for each track. The value

can only be decreased.

• Only one effect type can be set for

each song.

• The data may not be played back

accurately if you use the [REW] button

while editing the data.

VWrite the changes............................................................................................

When all the Initial Data changes have been made as desired, press

the WRITE button. At the “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt, press

the YES button to actually make the specified changes, or NO to cancel.

When this is completed, the WRITE button will change to UNDO,

allowing you to undo the Write operation and restore the data of the ed-

ited track to what it was before you made any edits.

• All edited data for any number of

tracks within a single song can be

written in a one-time Write operation,

by pressing the

WRITE

button.

• You can check if the results of the

Initial Edit are as you expected or not,

by starting and stopping playback with

the [PLAY/STOP] button before per-

forming the

UNDO

operation.

• The Undo function cannot be used if

you’ve selected another track or exited

from the Initial Edit mode.

• The Undo feature cannot be used for

data recorded to internal RAM (see

page 127).

BExit the Initial Edit function...................................................................

To do this, press the [REC] button.

➔The [REC] lamp goes out and the Initial Edit operation is com-

pleted.

You can also exit the Initial Edit function by pressing the [EXIT]

button.

If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written to

disk, a “Write edited data?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES

to write the edited data and exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit

without writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode

and continue editing.

Song Recording

127

Song Recording

Recording Without a Disk

The CVP-98/96 has internal RAM memory (about 25KB) that allows

a limited amount of recording — even if a disk is not loaded — up to

approximately 2,500 notes, if no other data is recorded. If you enter the

Song Record mode without inserting a disk, CVP MEMORY will be

indicated in the SONG display as shown below, and the Quick Record-

ing, Track Recording and Punch-in/out Recording functions will become

available.

• Chord Sequence data cannot be re-

corded to internal RAM memory.

• The Song Name function cannot be

engaged for data recorded to internal

RAM. However, the Track Edit func-

tion (page 122) and the Initial Edit

function (page 124) can be engaged

for data recorded to internal RAM.

When entering the Song Play mode after recording the song to inter-

nal RAM, the CVP indication is shown in the SONG section of the dis-

play, allowing you to playback normally.

If you insert a song disk (and select a song number) when the internal

RAM contains recorded song data, a “Delete CVP MEMORY?” confir-

mation prompt will appear. Press YES to delete the song data recorded

to the internal RAM. The song data recorded to internal RAM also can

be erased by turning the power off. If you wish to keep the recorded

data, use the Song Copy function (page 136) to copy the recorded data to

disk.

■ Playback.......................................................................................................................

The recorded song can be played back in the normal way.

Quick Record display when using the internal RAM.

Song PLAY MAIN display when playing back the internal RAM song.

• Song data recorded to internal RAM is

deleted when entering the Demo mode

or Custom Style mode, or when load-

ing Style Files. In such cases, a confir-

mation prompt does not appear.

128

CHAPTER 7: The Utility Functions

The Function mode provides various advanced functions that,

for example, let you make various MIDI settings, or give you

greater, more convenient control over disk-related operations.

These sophisticated functions let you customize the CVP-98/96

to your own musical needs and preferences.

Keyboard Group Tune Page 130

Transpose Page 130

Effect Setting Page 131

Key Touch Page 131

Pan Page 132

Pedal Group Left Pedal Page 133

Damper Range Page 134

Damper Mode Page 134

Soundboard (CVP-98 only) Page 134

Disk Group Format Page 135

Song Copy Page 136

Song Delete Page 138

Registration Page 139

Transform Page 142

MIDI Group Send Channel Page 143

Local Control Page 144

Sync Page 144

MIDI Filter Page 144

MIDI Transpose Page 146

Auto Accompaniment & Page 146

Harmony Transmission

Remote Keyboard Page 146

Backup Group Backup Page 147

Recall Page 148

Utility Group Micro Tuning Page 149

Scale Tuning Page 150

Pop-up Time Page 153

Alert Sound Page 153

The following functions are available:

129

■ Selecting and Operating the Functions.....................................

All functions in this mode can be selected and set by using the fol-

lowing procedure.

ZPress the [FUNCTION] button.

➔The lamp lights and the Function mode display appears.

XSelect the group by using the left/right LCD buttons, and call up the

page of the desired function by using the PAGE [<] [>] buttons.

You can also select the page from all the display pages by using the

PAGE [<] [>].

CFor the round-edged parameter box, press the appropriate LCD button

to highlight the desired section of the display, then use the data dial or

[–/+] button to change the settings.

For the sharp-edged parameter box, you can use the appropriate LCD

button to select and execute the functions.

VPress the [FUNCTION] button when finished.

➔The [FUNCTION] lamp will go out.

You can also exit by pressing the [EXIT] button.

SONG MIXER FUNCTION

MASTER

EQUALIZER

PA G E

130

■ Tune ...........................................................................................................................

The Tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch,

allowing you to accurately match the tuning with that of other instru-

ments. The frequency (in Hz) of A3 is displayed in the TUNE sec-

tion. It can be set in approximately 0.2-Hz steps over a range of +/–

approximately 26 Hz (+/– approximately 100 cents).

Keyboard

Keyboard 1 (KEYBOARD 1) Display — PAGE 1

Tune

• Range: 414.8 Hz (–102.1 cent) — 466.6Hz

(+101.62 cents)

Initial value : 440 Hz

Backup of last settings: OFF

Restoring the Basic Setting

• To restore the basic setting, simultaneously

press both the

TUNE

▼

▲

buttons or both

the [–/+] buttons.

Hz (Hertz)

• Pitch is measured in units of Hertz (abbrevi-

ated Hz), which represents the number of

times the sound wave vibrates in a second.

Cent

• Cent is a unit of pitch, equal to 1/100 of a

semitone. (100 cents = 1 semitone)

• Tune has no effect on the Drum Kit voices.

• The XG Master Tune setting is effective

when playing back songs containing XG

Master Tune data. The corresponding

value is indicated in the Keyboard 1 display

(Function display page 1).

■ Transpose............................................................................................................

The Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the

keyboard in semitone units, allowing you to match the pitch of the

keyboard to the range of other instruments or singers, or letting you

easily play in a different key without having to change your finger-

ing. For example, if the Transpose amount is set to “+5” semitones,

playing C results in a pitch of F, or in other words, you can play in

the key of C major on the keyboard and automatically have the pitch

transposed to F major.

Transpose

• Range: – 24 semitone (–2 octaves) — + 24

semitone (+ 2 octaves)

• Initial Value: 0

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Restoring the Basic Setting

• To restore the basic setting, simultaneously

press both the

TRANSPOSE

▼

▲

buttons or

both the [–/+] buttons.

Soundable Range of Transpose

• Notes below and above the original 88-key

range (A-1 to C7) sound one or two

octave(s) higher and lower, respectively.

• The Transpose function does not affect the

Drum Kit voices.

• When playing back songs containing XG

Transpose data, the XG Transpose data is

effective only for the data playback sound.

The value set on the panel affects the

keyboard sound.

• The value set here affects the play data

transmitted via MIDI.

131

■ Effect Setting ..........................................................................................................

This feature determines whether the basic effect setting (page 44) for

each voice is automatically selected or not, when the voice is selected.

To change the setting, press the EFFECT SETTING button. When set

to AUTO, the basic effect setting for each voice is automatically selected

when the voice is selected; when set to MANUAL, effect settings are not

changed when voices are selected.

Effect Setting

• Settings: AUTO, MANUAL

• Basic Setting: AUTO

• Backup of last setting: OFF

Effect Setting

• The effect type, effect depth and effect

ON/OFF parameters are set for each

voice.

Keyboard 2 (KEYBOARD 2) Display — PAGE 2

■ Key Touch...................................................................................................................

Key Touch determines how your playing strength (velocity) affects

the volume of the voices. Four types are available for tailoring the key-

board response to the selected voice, type of song, or your own playing

preferences. Select the type by pressing the KEY TOUCH button. The

data dial and [–/+] buttons cannot be used.

Settings

HARD This setting requires you to play the keys quite strongly to pro-

duce maximum loudness.

NORMAL This is the standard keyboard response and is used as the

basic setting.

SOFT This setting lets you produce a relatively loud sound even when

playing the keys softly.

FIXED This setting produces the same degree of loudness, no matter

how strongly or softly you play the keys. You can set the fixed

loudness by pressing the FIXED VELOCITY button to highlight

the parameter, then using the data dial or [–/+] buttons to set

the level (range: 1 — 127, basic setting: 76).

• This function does not affect the actual

weight of the keys.

Key Touch

• Basic setting: NORMAL

• Basic setting (of FIXED VELOCITY):

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Keyboard

132

■ Pan .....................................................................................................................................

Pan determines the stereo image of the voices, or in other words,

where the sound of the voice appears to come from — left, center, or

right. The Pan position can be set individually for the following three

voice assignments:

LEFT Left voice in the Split mode

RIGHT1 Right voice in the Split mode/1st voice in the Dual mode/voice

for normal keyboard performance

RIGHT2 2nd voice in the Dual mode

Relatively right

Pan

• Settings:

(left) — Center —

(right)

(21 steps)

• Basic setting: Settings for each voice

(center, key scale pan, drum kit pan)

* However, the basic settings of each

voice is displayed in the center

position in the LCD display.

• Backup of last settings: OFF

Restoring the Basic Setting

• To restore the basic setting, simultane-

ously press both [–/+] buttons.

The default Pan position for some voices features keyboard scaling.

This shifts the Pan position depending on what keys you play. The lower

you play on the keyboard, the more the sound shifts to the left; the higher

you play, the more the sound shifts to the right.

The Drum Kit voices have special pan settings for each individual

instrument. The Pan setting in this function moves the sound relatively

left or right of the special pan setting for each sound.

• The Pan setting affects all voices

globally.

• The Pan setting affects the keyboard-

played voices only.

• In the normal play mode (single voice

mode) only the

RIGHT1

(right range/

1st voice) setting is effective.

Relatively left

Center

Keyboard

133

Pedal

Pedal (PEDAL) Display — PAGE 3

■ Left Pedal....................................................................................................................

This function conveniently lets you set the left pedal to control one of

various functions.

Controllable Functions and Data

SOFT The left pedal functions as the soft pedal (basic setting).

(See page 40.)

START/STOP The left pedal functions the same as the [START/STOP]

button. (See page 89.)

HARMONY When the Harmony function is set to on, Harmony is ap-

plied only while the left pedal is held down. (See page

62.)

REGISTRATION The panel settings registered to the next Registration

number are recalled each time the left pedal is pressed.

(See page 84.)

MAIN A The left pedal performs the same function as the [MAIN A]

button. (See page 50.)

MAIN B The left pedal performs the same function as the [MAIN B]

button. (See page 50.)

ENDING/RIT. The left pedal performs the function same as the ENDING

button. You can have the song end ritardando (slow

down gradually) by pressing the left pedal twice in succes-

sion. (See page 53.)

BREAK Pressing the left pedal during the style playback produces

a break in the accompaniment and rhythm for as long as

the pedal is held. When the pedal is released, normal

playback resumes from the next measure. (See page 53.)

If you press the left pedal a second time within one meas-

ure, normal playback resumes immediately.

FADE IN/OUT The left pedal performs the function same as the [FADE

IN/OUT] button. (See pages 52 and 53.)

Left Pedal

• Basic setting: SOFT

• Backup of the last settings: OFF

• If the left pedal is set to REGISTRA-

TION, the setting of the left pedal

function in Registration memory is not

recalled.

CVP-96

134

Pedal

■ Damper Range.......................................................................................................

This determines whether the damper pedal affects the right-hand, left-

hand, or both voices in a Split setup. Press the DAMPER RANGE but-

ton to set. The data dial and the [–/+] buttons cannot be used.

Damper Range

• Settings: R (the damper pedal affects

only the right-hand voice), L (the

damper pedal affects only the left-hand

voice), R&L (the damper affects both

the left-and right-hand voices)

• Basic setting: R

• Backup of last settings: OFF

■ Damper Mode .........................................................................................................

This function lets you set how the damper pedal affects the sustain

sound. Pedal-controlled sustain can be done as a simple on/off switch, or

as a continuously changing sustain (in eight-step gradations) in which the

further down you press the pedal the longer the sound sustains. To set

the function, press the DAMPER MODE button. In this case, the data

dial and the [–/+] buttons cannot be used.

Damper Mode

• Settings: CONT. (continous changing

system)/SW (ON/OFF switch system)

• Basic Setting: CONT.

• Backup of the last settings: OFF

■ Soundboard Depth (CVP-98 only)....................................................

Certain piano voices (Grand Piano, Bright Piano, Mellow Piano, and

Mono Piano) feature a special effect which recreates the soundboard

resonance of an actual acoustic piano. A string resonance effect can also

be applied when pressing the damper pedal. This function lets you ad-

just the depth of these effects.

Soundboard Depth

• Value: 0 — 100

• Basic value: 50

• Backup of last settings: OFF

CVP-96

135

DISK IN USE

Disk

When using the disk-related function, make sure to first set the

[FUNCTION] button to on and call up the appropriate page before

inserting the floppy disk. Disk functions cannot be used — even

when pressing the [FUNCTION] button — if a floppy disk has been

inserted and the [SONG] button is set to on. In this case, press the

[SONG] button again so that the lamp goes out, then use the Disk

functions.

Format (FORMAT) Display — PAGE 4

Format the floppy disk for the use with the CVP-98/96. Refer to page

106 for information on formatting a new, blank disk or disks of different

formats.

The operation explained here is for re-formatting a disk that has al-

ready been used with the CVP-98/96 and deleting all data on the disk.

• Formatting a disk erases all the data

on the disk.

Types of Format

• 2DD disks are formatted into 720 KB,

while 2HD disks are formatted into

1.44 MB.

XExecute the format operation.............................................................

Press the START button.

➔An “Are you sure” confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to

execute the format or NO to cancel.

A bar graph appears in the LCD display during format to indiate the

process of format. Once a disk has been formatted, song data and other

data can be recorded, saved, or copied to it.

ZInsert the disk to be formatted..........................................................

Make sure that the disk’s write protect tab is set to the “write” posi-

tion, and insert the disk into the disk drive face up with the shutter for-

ward until it clicks into place.

Write protect tab closed

(unlocked — write enabled)

Shutter

Label

136

Disk

Song Copy (SONG COPY) Display — PAGE 5

This function allows you to copy song data (data files on disk) re-

corded by the CVP-98/96 to a different song number on the same disk, or

to a different disk.

ZSet up the disk(s). ............................................................................................

Insert the disk containing the source song.

➾Press either of the left-most two LCD buttons to select the copy

type. Two copy types are available.

DISK 1 – 1 This function allows you to copy the song to a different song

number on the same disk.

DISK 1 – 2 This function allows you to copy the song to a different disk.

XSelect the source song..............................................................................

Press the SONG ➔ button to highlight the parameter, then use the

data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the source song.

➔The selected song name will appear in the upper section of the

LCD display.

CSelect the destination song number

(DISK1 – 1 only).................................................................................................

This step is only for the DISK1 – 1 copy type. If you have selected

the DISK1 – 2 type copy, go on to step 4.

Press the SONG button to highlight the parameter, then use the data

dial or [–/+] buttons to select the destination song number.

➔If the destination song number already contains data, the name of

the song file will appear in the middle section of the LCD display.

In this case, the original data of the destination song number will

be erased and overwritten by the source song data when execut-

ing the copy operation.

• If the CVP-98/96’s internal memory

contains song data recorded without a

disk, the

CVP

mode will be automati-

cally selected for copying the internal

memory data to disk (see page 138),

and the

DISK1 – 1

DISK1 – 2

copy

mode cannot be selected. In this case

if you want to keep the data of internal

memory, copy it to disk first, and delete

the internal memory data by using the

Song Delete function (page 138).

Then, attempt the

DISK1 – 1

DISK1 – 2

copy operation again.

• When using the Copy function within

the same disk, the operation cannot be

performed if the destination song is set

to the same number as the source

song. In this case, a “Select a different

number!” message appears.

137

VExecute the Copy operation. ...............................................................

Press the COPY button.

➔The Copy operation begins. If you are copying to the same disk,

an “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press the

YES button to continue or the NO button to cancel.

• The copy operation is not effective if

the same song numbers are selected

as the source song and the destination

song in the

DISK1 – 1

type copy. In

this case, a “Select a different

number!” message will appear.

If you are copying the data to a different disk, a “Number of disk ex-

change (**)” message appears to indicate the number of times the disk

will have to be changed. Press the OK button to continue, or the CAN-

CEL button to abort the operation.

When copying to a different disk, follow the instructions in the LCD

display, changing the source and destination disks as necessary.

The first time the destination disk is inserted, the following LCD dis-

play will appear. Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the destina-

tion song number.

➾If the destination song number already contains data, the song

name will appear in the LCD display. In this case, the original data

of the destination song number will be erased and overwritten by

the source song data when executing the copy operation. Press

the OK button to continue, or CANCEL to abort.

Caution on Copying Commercial Soft-

ware

• Copying of commercially available

software is strictly prohibited, except

for your personal use.

• Data files (other than those made with

the CVP-98/96/94/92) that have been

copied once cannot be copied a sec-

ond time to another disk. Also, addi-

tional data can be recorded only to the

right-hand/left-hand parts of the copied

DOC files.

• Song data of the CVP-94/92/79A/69/

69A/59S can be copied by the CVP-

98/96.

Disk

138

Disk

● Copying Data Recorded Without a Disk

If you’ve recorded a song without inserting a disk, the song data is

automatically recorded to the CVP-98/96’s internal RAM. To copy the

data to the disk, first select the Song Copy display and insert a formatted

disk.

Song Delete (SONG DELETE) Display — PAGE 6

You can delete unneeded song data from the disk in this display. Be

careful not to delete any important data on the disk; once the Delete op-

eration is performed, it cannot be undone.

ZSet up the disk. ...................................................................................................

Insert the disk containing the song data to be deleted into the disk

drive.

XSelect the song to be deleted.............................................................

Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the song to be deleted. The

song data in the CVP-98/96’s internal RAM can be also deleted with this

operation. To do this, select the CVP MEMORY parameter instead of

the song number (CVP MEMORY appears only when the internal RAM

contains song data).

CExecute the Delete operation..............................................................

Press the DELETE button.

➔An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press the

YES button to delete the selected song, or press the NO button to

cancel the operation.

➾Select the destination song number, then copy to disk in

the normal way.

The CVP - DISK parameter is automatically selected, with

the internal RAM data as the source data for copying.

139

This function allows you to save the panel settings registered using

the Registration function to disk, load Registration data from disk, delete

Registration data from a disk, or name Registration files.

Before executing the Registration function, make sure that the disk you

want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive.

Refer to page 35 in the Reference Manual for a list of settings regis-

tered by the Registration function.

ZSelect the file type. .........................................................................................

Press either of the two left-most LCD buttons to select the file type to

be loaded, saved, deleted or named.

Registration (REGISTRATION) Display — PAGE 7

REGISTRATION Contains each or all Registration file(s) in 20 Registration

memory locations.

ALL SETUP An All Setup file contains all panel setting data in the list

on page 35 in the Reference Manual.

To save or load the data of REGISTRATION, first set the REGIST

(Registration number) parameter. When saving, press the REGIST but-

ton to select the desired Registration file number from ALL or A-1 —

E-4 to save to disk. When loading, select the internal destination loca-

tion from ALL or A-1 — E-4.

XSelect the file operation............................................................................

Use the second LCD button from the right to select the desired file

operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

CPress the START button.............................................................................

➔Operation begins.

The subsequent steps for each file operation depend on the operation

you’ve selected. Refer to the corresponding instructions for each opera-

tion below.

Disk

140

Disk

■ SAVE ................................................................................................................................

When you select SAVE, the name entry function display for the file to

be saved will appear.

Press the CHAR > button to move the underline cursor, and select the

character position of the file name. (File names can contain up to twelve

characters.)

➾Use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to highlight the characters to be

input.

Press the CHAR SET button to input the selected characters at the

current underline position of the file name. Continue moving the cursor

to other characters or marks and entering them in this way.

To delete the character at the previous position, press the BACK

SPACE button. The character before the underline cursor is deleted and

the cursor moves back to the deleted position.

To abort the name entry operation and return to the FUNCTION

[REGISTRATION] display, press the CANCEL button.

When the file name has been completely entered, press the SAVE

button to execute the Save operation.

If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name!

Overwrite?” message will appear. Press the OK button to overwrite the

original file with the new file, or CANCEL to abort the Save operation.

■ NAME...............................................................................................................................

When you select NAME, the Name function display will appear.

141

■ LOAD ...............................................................................................................................

When you select LOAD, the Load function display will appear. The

original internal data will be erased and overwritten when executing the

Load operation. Make sure to save all important data to disk (see page

140) before using the Load operation.

First, select the desired file to be loaded. Press either of

the two left-most LCD buttons to select the file, then press

the OK button.

➔An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear.

Press the YES button to load the selected file, or the

NO button to abort the Load operation.

■ DELETE.........................................................................................................................

When you select DELETE, the Delete function display will appear.

First, select the desired file to be deleted. Press either of

the two left-most LCD buttons to select the file, then press

the OK button.

➔An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear.

Press the YES button to delete the selected file, or the

NO button to abort the Delete operation.

First, select the desired file to be named. Press either of the two left-

most LCD buttons to select the file, then press the OK button.

➾The name entry display will appear. Enter a new file name in the

same way as described above for the Save function.

➾Pressing the OK button changes the current name to the newly

entered name. Press the CANCEL button to abort. If you enter a

name that already exists on the disk, a “Same name! Overwrite?”

message will appear. In this case, press the OK button to

overwrite the original file with the renamed file, or CANCEL to

abort the Name operation.

Disk

142

Transform (TRANSFORM) Display — PAGE 8

This function allows you to convert song data recorded on the CVP-

98/96 so that the data can be played back on other Clavinova models or a

Disklavier.

Make sure to insert a proper disk (2DD disk containing the data to be

converted) in the disk drive.

Compatible Disk Types for Data Con-

version

• Only 2DD type disks can be used for

this operation. If a 2HD disk is used a

“2HD disk is not valid! Please copy to

2DD disk.” message will appear. In

this case, first copy the song you wish

to convert to a 2DD disk by using the

Song Copy function (page 136), then

attempt the conversion again.

• Data in the Clavinova’s internal

memory cannot be converted until it is

saved to disk.

About the CVP-94/92/59S/69A/69/79A

Clavinovas

• The CVP-94/92/59S/69A/69/79A

Clavinovas can play back the song

data recorded on the CVP-98/96 with-

out conversion.

• The original pre-converted data re-

mains intact even after the conversion

has been executed.

ZSelect the conversion type....................................................................

Use either of the two left-most LCD buttons to select the target for-

mat of the file (the instrument for which the converted data is to be

used). The following three types are available.

CVP PERFORMANCE This type converts the selected data for playback on

the CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, CLP-705,

DOM-30, and DOU-10.

PIANO FORMAT 1 This type converts the data for playback on the

Disklavier, excepting the MX100A and MX100B.

PIANO FORMAT 2 This type converts the data for playback on the

Disklavier MX100A or MX100B.

XSelect the song to be converted by using the data

dial or [–/+] buttons. ......................................................................................

• If data converted to PIANO FORMAT

1/2 is played back on the CVP series,

DOM-30 or DOU-10 instruments,

tracks 1 and 2 will not sound.

CPress the TRANSFORM button. .........................................................

An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press the YES

button to start data conversion of the selected song, or the NO button to

cancel the operation. When the conversion process is finished, a “Com-

pleted! SONG No.**” message appears to indicate the song number to

which the data was saved.

If the conversion was executed by using CVP PERFORMANCE,

“C)” is added to the beginning of the original name, and if the conver-

sion was executed by the PIANO FORMAT 1/2, “P)” is added to the

beginning of the original name.

• Recording or editing cannot be per-

formed on the converted songs.

Disk

143

MIDI

MIDI 1 Display — PAGE 9

■ Set the Send Channel SEND CH ..........................................................

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and

receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer (channels

1 through 16). This function sets the MIDI transmit channels of the

CVP-98/96 .

Independent MIDI channels can be set for the following three differ-

ent types of play data.

LEFT Left voice in the Split mode

RIGHT1 Right voice in the Split mode/1st voice in the Dual mode/voice

for normal keyboard performance

RIGHT2 2nd voice in the Dual mode

Transmission Channel

•

LEFT

setting: OFF (no transmission),

channels 1 — 16

• Basic setting: 3

• Backup of last settings: OFF

•

RIGHT 1

setting: OFF (no transmis-

sion), channels 1 — 16

• Basic setting: 1

• Backup of last settings: OFF

•

RIGHT 2

setting: OFF (no transmis-

sion), channels 1 — 16

• Basic setting: 2

• Backup of last settings: OFF

● MIDI Reception

The CVP-98/96 always receives MIDI data in the “Multi Timbre” mode. This is a mode in which the

CVP-98/96 voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by

an external MIDI device. This means that you can produce the sound of a full band or ensemble on the

CVP-98/96 by using a computer or MIDI sequencer.

Functions related to MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface)

can be called up from pages 9 through 11.

• If you are using the MIDI terminals, set the HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI”.

144

MIDI

■ Sync..................................................................................................................................

Playback of songs and Auto Accompaniment is normally controlled

by the internal clock (INT.) of the CVP-98/96 at a specific tempo. By

setting this clock to “EXT.”, the CVP-98/96’s tempo can be controlled

by an external sequencer or rhythm machine. For example, this lets you

play the Auto Accompaniment of the CVP-98/96 in perfect synchroniza-

tion with an external sequencer.

To set this, press the SYNC. button. The data dial and the [–/+] but-

tons cannot be used.

Sync

• Settings: INT. (internal clock)/EXT.

(external clock)

• Basic setting: INT.

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• If the clock mode is set to EXT. and a

MIDI clock signal is not being received

from an external source, features

related to the Auto Accompaniment

and the accompaniment styles cannot

be used.

MIDI 2 Display — PAGE 10

The MIDI 2 function display contains the MIDI filter settings which

can be used to turn transmission and reception of certain types of MIDI

data on or off.

■ Program ON/OFF ................................................................................................

Normally the CVP-98/96 will respond to MIDI program change num-

bers received from an external keyboard or another MIDI device. For

example, the CVP-98/96 can change voices in response to MIDI pro-

gram change messages received from a connected MIDI sequencer.

(These messages do not affect the keyboard-played voices.) The voices

of connected external MIDI devices can also be changed by program

change messages transmitted from the CVP-98/96. (Program change

messages are transmitted when changing voices on the panel of the CVP-

98/96.)

Depending on your particular MIDI setup, you may find that this fea-

ture is convenient in some cases and not in others. Set PROGRAM to

off if you wish to disable the program change transmission/reception.

Set PROGRAM to “Tx&Rx” to turn on transmission/reception of pro-

gram change messages.

Program

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/re-

ceived), OFF (not transmitted/re-

ceived)

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• Bank MSB and LSB messages can be

transmitted and received even when

Program is set to off.

■ Local Control ON/OFF LOCAL .............................................................

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the CVP-98/96 key-

board controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to

be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is called “Local

Control ON”. When the local control is set to off, the “keyboard” and

“sound source” are separated and no sound is output through the CVP-

98/96 when playing the keyboard. However, the data of the keyboard

performance is output through MIDI. By setting Local Control to off,

you can play an external MIDI tone generator from the keyboard of the

CVP-98/96 without sounding the internal voices.

To set this, press the LOCAL button. The data dial and [–/+] buttons

cannot be used.

Local Control

• Settings: ON/OFF

• Basic setting: ON

• Backup of last settings: OFF

145

The program numbers of the CVP-98/96’s voices are standarized ac-

cording to the XG voice allocation. See the Voice List on page 26 in the

Reference Manual for details.

■ Control ON/OFF ...................................................................................................

Control change messages are used for various non-keyboard perform-

ance controls, such as the damper pedal, or for expressive control of the

sound of a connected MIDI device, such as effects and volume. For ex-

ample, the CVP-98/96 can respond to control change messages transmit-

ted from an external MIDI sequencer. (These messages do not affect the

keyboard-played voices.) Similarly, an external MIDI device can be

controlled by sending control change messages from the CVP-98/96 to

that device. (Control change messages are transmitted when operating

the damper pedal, etc. on the CVP-98/96.) Set CONTROL to off if you

want control change messages not to be transmitted or received.

Control change data recognized by the CVP-98/96 is listed in detail

on page 10 in the Reference Manual.

Control

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/re-

ceived), OFF (not transmitted/re-

ceived)

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

• Backup of last settings: OFF

■ System Exclusive ON/OFF.......................................................................

System exclusive messages are used for more advanced or detailed

MIDI control, or for controls related to specific manufacturer’s devices.

Set SYS EX. to off if you desire not to transmit/receive the system exclu-

sive messages. Set SYS EX. to “Tx&Rx” enable transmission and re-

ception of these messages.

System exclusive data recognized by the CVP-98/96 is listed in detail

on page 12 in the Reference Manual.

System Exclusive

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/re-

ceived), OFF (not transmitted/re-

ceived)

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

• Backup of last settings: OFF

■ Start/Stop ON/OFF ............................................................................................

By using the Start/Stop command, the rhythm and performance of the

receiving device can be started/stopped from the sending device via

MIDI. For example, you can transmit the start/stop command from an

external MIDI sequencer to start and stop the Auto Accompaniment or

song playback on the CVP-98/96. Also, the playback of an external

MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine can be started/stopped by starting/

stopping the Auto Accompaniment on the CVP-98/96. Set START/

STOP to off if you want to disable transmission/reception of start/stop.

Set it to on to enable transmission/reception.

Start/Stop

• Settings: Tx&Rx (transmitted/re-

ceived), OFF (not transmitted/re-

ceived)

• Basic setting: Tx&Rx

• Backup of last settings: OFF

MIDI

146

MIDI 3 Display — PAGE 11

From the MIDI 3 display you can set whether or not MIDI data re-

ceived from an external device is affected by the Transpose setting (page

130) or not, whether or not the Auto Accompaniment, rhythm and Har-

mony data is transmitted, and whether or not the MIDI data received

from an external device affects the keyboard-played voices.

■ MIDI Transpose Receive .............................................................................

When MIDI TRANSPOSE is set to on, the Transpose setting (page

130) will affect the MIDI data received by the CVP-98/96.

Transpose Receive

• Settings: ON (enabled), OFF (disa-

bled)

• Basic setting: ON

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• The Transpose setting made in the

KEYBOARD 1 Page 1 in the Function

section is effective for data transmitted

via MIDI.

■ Transmitting Auto Accompaniment /Harmony Data ....

When the ACMP&RHY parameter is set to on, accompaniment data

is transmitted via the MIDI [OUT] terminal when playing back the Auto

Accompaniment. The data is transmitted over MIDI channels 9 - 16.

If the HARMONY parameter is set to on, Harmony data is transmitted

via the MIDI [OUT] terminal when using the Harmony function. The

data is transmitted over MIDI channels 6 - 8.

The Auto Accompaniment or Harmony can be recorded to a computer

or external sequencer by using these functions.

Auto Accompaniment/ Harmony

Transmission

• Setting of

ACMP

RHY

: OFF (not

transmitted), 9 - 16 ch (transmitted)

• Basic setting: OFF (not transmitted)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• Setting of

HARMONY

: OFF (not

trasmit), 6 - 8 ch (transmit)

• Basic setting: OFF (not transmit)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• When transmitting the Auto Accompa-

niment or Harmony data via MIDI, do

not select the Auto Accompaniment/

Harmony MIDI channels 6 - 8 or 9 - 16

for transmitting the data of your key-

board performance. Doing so may

result in your keyboard performance

data being mixed with the Auto Accom-

paniment or Harmony data.

• If either the

ACMP

RHY

HAR-

MONY

is turned on, the Auto Accom-

paniment or Harmony playback data is

transmitted via MIDI, even if the

RIGHT

transmission channel (page 143) is

turned off.

■ Remote Keyboard..............................................................................................

MIDI data received over the channel set in the REMOTE KBD pa-

rameter will affect your keyboard performance. The received data also

can be recorded. Select OFF to prevent external MIDI data from affect-

ing your keyboard performance. The following four data types can be

received.

• Key ON/OFF

• Control Change (performance expression data; only those listed below)

Remote Keyboard

• Settings: OFF (not received), 1 - 16

(received over the specified channel)

• Basic setting: OFF

• Backup of last settings: OFF

• MIDI data received by the remote

keyboard function cannot be output via

the MIDI [OUT] terminal.

MIDI

#1 Modulation

#7 Volume

#11 Expression

#64 Sustain Pedal

#65 Sostenuto Pedal

• Program Change (voice change data)

• Pitch Bend

#66 Soft Pedal

#123 All notes off

BANK Select MSB

BANK Select LSB

147

Backup

Backup (BACKUP) Display — PAGE 12

This function allows you to set the backup of various parameter

groups on or off. When set to on, the corresponding settings will not be

reset to the basic settings (default settings) when power is turned off.

Press the ▼ or ▲ button or use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select

the desired group, then use the right-most LCD button to set the selected

group to backup on/off. The (“*”) mark at the beginning of the group

name indicates that the backup setting of the group is turned on. The

settings of groups whose backup settings are set to off will return to the

basic settings (default settings) when the power is turned off.

Backup is used for the following groups on the CVP-98/96.

• VOICE SETTING

• REVERB/EFFECT

• TUNE (master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning)

• PEDAL

• ACMP SETTING (Auto Accompaniment-related settings)

• SONG SETTING

• REGISTRATION

• MIDI SETTING

• UTILITY (pop-up time, alert sound)

Refer to the list on page 35 in the Reference Manual for the specific

parameters of each group.

Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a

week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters

will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer

than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are main-

tained, turn the power on for a few munutes at least once a week.

• The basic settings (default settings) for

the BACKUP function are as follows:

REGISTRATION and UTILITY are set

to ON, all other parameter groups are

set to OFF.

• The Help language and backup on/off

setting itself are always backed up.

148

Recall (RECALL) Display — PAGE 13

This funciton can be used to recall the initial factory settings (basic

settings) for a range of parameters — individually or all at once.

Press the ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select

the group you want to recall, then press the START button.

➔An “Are you sure?” confirmation prompt will appear. Press the

YES button to recall or NO to cancel.

The following parameter groups of the CVP-98/96 can be recalled.

• VOICE SETTING

• REVERB/EFFECT

• TUNE (master tuning, micro tuning, scale tuning)

• PEDAL

• ACMP SETTING (Auto Accompaniment-related settings)

• SONG SETTING

• REGISTRATION

• MIDI SETTING

• UTILITY (pop-up time, alert sound)

• ALL (all the above settings)

Refer to the list on page 35 in the Reference Manual for the specific

parameters of each group.

• The initial settings (basic settings) for

the Help language and the above

backup on/off settings are not recalled

by this function.

However, these and all other settings

can be reset to the initial factory values

by turning the power on while holding

the right-most key on the keyboard

(C7). When this is done, a “Back up

data erased and replaced by Factory

data” message appears to indicate that

all backed up data is erased and all

factory setttings are recalled. After this

message, the main display will appear.

Backup

149

Utility

Micro Tuning (MICRO TUNING) Display — PAGE 14

The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each

key of the keyboard. The created tuning can be saved to a disk and

loaded whenever necessary. The set tuning can be turned on or off at

anytime by using the left-most LCD button in this display.

ZSelect the desired key.................................................................................

Press any desired key to be tuned.

➔The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key

will appear in the display.

XSet the tuning.......................................................................................................

Press the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons or use the data dial or [–/+] to tune

the pitch of the selected key. If you set the parameter at the left-most

LCD button to ON, you can play the key being tuned in order to check

the sound during this operation. The normal tuning of ±0 cents for the

selected key can be instantly recalled by simultaneously pressing both

the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons.

• Range: –100 cents (– 1 semitone) —

+100 cents (+ 1 semitone)

• Basic Value: 0 (for all keys)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

CRepeat steps 1 and 2....................................................................................

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all the required keys have been tuned.

......................................................................................................................................................

The completed tuning can be named as a tuning file and saved to

disk. It can also be loaded whenever necessary or deleted if not needed.

Make sure that a proper disk (either containing the micro tuning data

or set up for saving) is inserted in the disk drive before executing these

file operations.

150

SAVE See page 140.

NAME See page 140.

LOAD See page 141.

DELETE See page 141.

XPress the START button.............................................................................

After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the

selected file operation appears.

The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140

and 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file opera-

tion.

ZSelect the desired file operation. ....................................................

Use the LCD button located second from right to select the desired

file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

Scale Tuning (SCALE TUNING) Display — PAGE 15

This feature allows you to select from various tuning (temperament)

configurations, when selecting PRESET in this display. By selecting

USER, you can create your own user scale, in which the tuning you set

for a single octave takes effect for the entire keyboard. The created tun-

ing can be saved to disk for future recall.

■ Preset Scale .............................................................................................................

This function lets you select from various pre-programmed tunings or

temperaments.

Until equal temperament — the most commonly used tuning at

present — was accepted, various tunings have been created over the

years for use with the particular music and instruments of the era. This

feature lets you play in historically authentic tunings, and get a better

feeling for the music of the corresponding eras.

The CVP-98/96 contains the following seven temperaments.

• EQUAL

• PURE(MAJOR)

• PURE(MINOR)

• MEANTONE

• PYTHAGOREAN

• WERCKMEISTER

• KIRNBERGER

Utility

151

■ User Scale ..................................................................................................................

This function allows you to individually tune each key within an oc-

tave.

The setting made for one key is automatically assigned to the same

key in all other octaves.

Utility

XPress the SCALE ▼ or ▲ to highlight the parameter, then use the data

dial or [–/+] buttons to select the temperament type.

When selecting temperaments other than equal (EQUAL) tempera-

ment, the central key (reference pitch for the temperament) must be set.

This allows you to produce the proper temperament in the desired key.

CPress the KEY button to highlight the parameter, then use the data

dial or [–/+] buttons to select the central key.

Central Key

• Settings: C, C

, D, D

, E, F, F

, G,

, A, A

, B

• Basic setting: C

ZSelect PRESET with the left-most LCD button, and the following

display appears.

ZSelect USER with the left-most LCD button left; the following dis-

play will appear.

Utility

152

XPress the desired key to be tuned.

➔The note name and the current tuning value of the pressed key

appears.

CSet the pitch by pressing the TUNE ▼ or ▲ buttons, or by using the

data dial or [–/+] buttons. You can play the key being tuned to check

the sound during this operation. The default tuning of ±0 cents can be

instantly recalled for the selected key by simultaneously pressing the

TUNE ▼ and ▲ buttons.

Scale Tuning — User

• Range: –64 cents — +63 cents

• Basic Value: 0 (for all keys)

• Backup of last settings: OFF

SAVE See page 140.

NAME See page 140.

LOAD See page 141.

DELETE See page 141.

Utility

VRepeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned.

................................................................................................................................................

The completed tuning can be named as a tuning file and saved to

disk. It can also be loaded whenever necessary or deleted if not needed.

Make sure that a proper disk (either containing the scale tuning data

or set up for saving) is inserted in the disk drive before executing these

file operations.

ZSelect the desired file operation.

Use the LCD button located second from right to select the desired

file operation: LOAD, SAVE, DELETE or NAME.

XPress the START button.

After the START button is pressed, the display corresponding to the

selected file operation appears.

The subsequent steps are the same as those explained on pages 140

and 141. Refer to the pages below, depending on the selected file

operation.

153

Pop-up Time (POPUP TIME) Display — PAGE 16

This determines the amount of time the pop-up displays remain on the

display screen before disappearing. The pop-up time of the voice/ac-

companiment style displays can be set independently from all other pop-

up displays.

To set the pop-up time of voice/accompaniment style, first press the

VOICE/STYLE button to highlight the parameter, then use the data dial

or [–/+] buttons. To set the pop-up time for the other displays, use the

same method as above, pressing the OTHERS button instead of the

VOICE/STYLE button. The default pop-up time can be recalled by

pressing the corresponding ▼ and ▲ buttons simultaneously.

Pop-up Time

• Range: 0sec (0 second) — 30sec (30

seconds),

∞

sec (remains indefinitely)

• Basic settings: 15 seconds for voice/

accompaniment style, 8 seconds for

others

• Backup of last settings: ON

• When 0sec (0 seconds) is selected,

the the popup display will be displayed

only while the operating button is held.

∞

sec is selected, the [DISPLAY

HOLD] lamp will not flash and the pop-

up display will not close automatically.

In this case, press the [EXIT] button to

close the display.

Utility

Alert Sound (ALERT) Display — PAGE 17

This function allows you to select one of six “Alert Voices” which

will sound when an error is encountered, and set the alert volume.

Press the VOICE ▼ or ▲ button to highlight the parameter, then use

the data dial or [–/+] buttons to select the desired alert sound. The alert

sound automatically plays when it is selected, allowing you to check the

sound during the operation. The default alert sound can be recalled in-

stantly by pressing the [–/+] buttons simultaneously.

To set the alert volume, press the VOLUME button to highlight the

parameter, then use the data dial or [–/+] buttons . The default volume

level of 50 can be recalled instantly by pressing the [–/+] buttons simul-

taneously.

Alert Sound

• Settings: STEEL DRUMS, AGOGO,

WOOD BLOCK, TIMPANI, CELESTA

4FT, KALIMBA

• Basic setting: STEEL DRUMS

• Backup of last settings: ON

• Volume range: 0 — 100

• Basic setting: 50

• Backup of last setting: ON

154

CHAPTER 8: Others

The Connectors

■ [PHONES] Jacks..................................................................................................

Recommended Headphones:

• Yamaha HPE-160 headphones

■ AUX IN [L/L+R] Jacks.....................................................................................

• Do not return the sound output

through AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks

to the AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks.

Also, when connecting the AUX

OUT [L/L+R] [R] jacks to external

audio equipment, do not connect

these devices back into the CVP-98/

96’s AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks.

Since the input sound from the

CVP-98/96’s AUX IN [L/L+R] [R] is

output through the CVP-98/96’s AUX

OUT [L/L+R] [R] as is, connecting as

described above may result in feed-

back, making normal playback im-

possible and even resulting in dam-

age to the instrument.

• Internal [MASTER VOLUME] and

[REVERB] settings cannot be applied

to the input sound received at the AUX

IN [L/L+R] [R] jacks.

• Use the AUX IN [L/L+R] and AUX OUT

[L/L+R] jacks for mono input and mono

output, respectively.

To use headphones, connect them to one of

the [PHONES] jacks (standard 1/4" phone

jacks). The internal speaker system of the

CVP-98/96 is automatically shut off when a

pair of headphones are connected. Two people

can enjoy the sound together by connecting

two pairs of headphones to the two available

terminals.

The sounds of other instruments or tone

generator modules can be output through the

speaker system of the CVP-98/96 by connect-

ing audio cables to the jacks as shown below.

L+R

AUX IN

Tone Generator

■ [MIC.VOL.] Dial and [MIC.] Jack .........................................................

By connecting a microphone to the [MIC.]

jack (standard 1/4” phone), you can enjoy sing-

ing along with your own performace or with

song playback. The sound input from the mi-

crophone is output through the CVP-98/96’s

speakers. The microphone volume can be ad-

justed with the [MIC.VOL.] dial.

PHONES

MIN MAX

MIC. VOL. MIC.

PHONES

MIN MAX

MIC. VOL. MIC.

155

The Connectors

■ MIDI [IN] [OUT] [THRU] Terminals....................................................

Connect the CVP-98/96 to external MIDI

devices by using MIDI connecting cables.

Set the HOST SELECT switch below to

“MIDI” when using the MIDI terminals.

■ HOST SELECT switch and [TO HOST] terminals ............

[TO HOST] terminal is connected di-

rectly to the personal computer.

Set the HOST SELECT switch to match

the corresponding computer or connected

MIDI device.

See the section “Connecting to a Personal

Computer” for details.

Personal Computer

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

■ AUX OUT [L/L+R] [R] Jacks ....................................................................

AUX OUT

Stereo System

By connecting audio cables to the jacks

as shown below, output the sound of the

CVP-98/96 to a stereo system, amplifier,

mixing console, or recording equipment.

Set the [MASTER VOLUME] of the CVP-

98/96 to around the middle position and

adjust the volume level from the connected

equipment.

■ [EXP.PEDAL] Terminal ..................................................................................

An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller

can be connected to this terminal for control-

ling the volume of your keyboard perform-

ance with your foot.

Tone Generator MIDI Sequencer

OUT

THRU

MIDI

EXP. PEDAL

156

Connecting to a Personal Computer

Although the CVP-98/96 can be connected to a personal computer

via the MIDI IN/OUT connectors and a MIDI interface, the TO

HOST connector and HOST SELECT switch allow direct connec-

tion to Apple Macintosh, IBM-PC/AT, or NEC PC-9801/9821 series

personal computers for sequencing and other music applications

without the need for a separate MIDI interface.

■

Connecting to an Apple Macintosh Series Computer

.......

Connect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the modem or printer

port on your Macintosh, depending on which port your MIDI software is using

for MIDI data communication, using a standard Macintosh 8-pin system periph-

eral cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch to the “Mac” position.

You may also have to make other MIDI interface settings on the computer

side, depending on the type of software you use (refer to your software owner’s

manual). In any case the clock speed should be set to 1 MHz.

■ Connecting to an IBM-PC/AT Series Computer ................

Connect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on your

IBM computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cross cable. Set

the HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-2” position.

Refer to your software owner’s manual for information on any settings you

might have to make on the computer side.

2 (HSK i)1

1 (HSK 0)2

5 (RxD-)3

MINI DIN

8-PIN

4 GND4

3 (TxD-)5

8 (RxD+)6

7 (GP i)7

6 (TxD+)8

MINI DIN

8-PIN

8 (CTS)1

7 (RST)2

2 (RxD)3

4 5 (GND)

3 (TxD) 5

MINI DIN

8-PIN D-SUB

9-PIN

● “Mac” Cable Connections

• 8-pin system peripheral cable.

• Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps.

● “PC-2” Cable Connections

• 8-pin mini DIN → 9-pin D-SUB cable. Use a “PC-1” type

cable if your computer uses a 25-pin serial port.

• Data transfer rate: 38,400 bps.

Apple Macintosh

Series Computer

Set to the “Mac”

position.

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

IBM-PC/AT

Series Computer

Set to the “PC-2”

position.

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

• When using the [TO HOST]

terminal of the CVP-98/96,

first turn the power off on both

the CVP-98/96 and the com-

puter before connecting the

cable. After connecting the

cable, turn the power of the

computer on first, then the

CVP-98/96.

• When not using the [TO

HOST] terminal of the CVP-

98/96, make sure the cable is

disconnected from the [TO

HOST] terminal. If the cable

is left connected, the CVP-98/

96 may not function properly.

• When the HOST SELECT

switch is set to “Mac”, “PC-1”,

or “PC-2, no data transfer

occurs via the MIDI connec-

tors. To use the MIDI connec-

tors for connection via a

standard MIDI interface, set

the HOST SELECT switch to

“MIDI”.

• If your system doesn’t work

properly with the connections

and settings listed above,

your software may require

different settings. Check your

software operation manual

and set the HOST SELECT

switch to the position that

provides the appropriate data

transfer rate.

157

Connecting to a Personal Computer

■ Connecting to an NEC PC-9801/9821 Series Compu-

ter.......................................................................................................................................

The NEC PC-9801/9821 computers are widely used in Japan. Con-

nect the TO HOST connector of the Clavinova to the RS-232C port on

your NEC computer, using a standard 8-pin MINI DIN → 25-pin D-SUB

cross cable. Set the HOST SELECT switch to the “PC-1” position.

Refer to your software owner’s manual for information on any set-

tings you might have to make on the computer side.

MINI DIN

8-PIN

D-SUB

25-PIN

5 (CTS)1

4 (RTS)2

3 (RxD)3

4 7 (GND)

2 (TxD) 5

● “PC-1” Cable Connections

• 8-pin mini DIN → 25-pin D-SUB cable. Use a “PC-2” type

cable if your computer uses a 9-pin serial port.

• Data transfer rate: 31,250 bps.

● MIDI Driver

The included Music Software Collection disk also contains special

MIDI Driver software, which may be necessary when using computer

software with the CVP-98/96. Install the MIDI driver from the disk to

your computer if necessary. Refer to the text files on the disks listed

below for installation instructions.

Windows 95:

A:\driver\win95\readme.txt

A:\driver\win95\license.txt

Windows 3.1 (IBM PC Series):

A:\driver\win31\ibmpc\cbxt3.txt

“A:” is the disk directory.

● Connector Pin Numbers

123456789

10 11 12

14 15 16 17

18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25

678

D-SUB 9-PIN

MINI DIN 8-PIN

D-SUB 25-PIN

NEC PC-9801/9821

Series Computer

Set to the “PC-1”

position.

HOST SELECTTO HOST

MIDIMac

PC-2PC-1

Trademarks

• Apple and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

• IBM-PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

• PC-9801/9821 is a trademark of NEC Corporation.

• Windows is the registered trademark of Microsoft® Corporation.

• All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.

158

Index

Accompaniment style ........................... 47

Alert Sound ........................................ 153

Auto Accompaniment ..................... 47, 56

Auto Accompaniment/Song Volume .... 17

Backup ......................................... 16, 147

Break .................................................... 53

Chord Assist ......................................... 66

Chord Sequence ................................ 116

computer, connecting to a .................. 156

contrast ................................................ 15

Custom Style ........................................ 68

Damper Range................................... 134

Damper Mode .................................... 134

Demo play ............................................ 24

Demo Song List.................................... 26

Dual ...................................................... 33

Easy Play ........................................... 100

Effect Setting ...................................... 131

Effect Type List .................................... 45

Effects .................................................. 44

English Help ......................................... 22

Expression Pedal ......................... 18, 155

File Icons .............................................. 88

Fingered ......................................... 56, 59

floppy disks ............................................ 7

Format ........................................ 106, 135

free tempo software ............................. 90

Freeze .................................................. 86

Full Keyboard (FULL KEYBOARD)

.. 56, 59

Function mode ................................... 128

Guide.................................................. 100

Harmony............................................... 62

headphones ................................... 9, 154

Help ...................................................... 22

Initial Edit............................................ 124

key cover ................................................ 8

Key Touch .......................................... 131

Keyboard 1 ......................................... 130

Keyboard 2 ......................................... 131

keyboard guide lamps ........................ 104

Keyboard Percussion ........................... 32

LCD buttons ......................................... 12

LCD display .......................................... 12

left pedal............................................. 133

Local Control ...................................... 144

Lyrics .................................................. 104

Master Equalizer .................................. 19

messages .. 16, 78; 2 (Reference Manual)

metronome ........................................... 54

Microphone ........................................ 154

Micro Tuning ...................................... 149

MIDI 1................................................. 143

MIDI 2................................................. 144

MIDI 3................................................. 146

MIDI filter settings .............................. 144

Mixer ........................................ 17, 60, 94

Multi Finger .................................... 56, 59

music stand ............................................ 8

Next Note ........................................... 100

One Touch Setting ............................... 63

Organ Combination .............................. 29

Pan ..................................................... 132

Part Cancel .......................................... 91

Part....................................................... 71

pedals........................................... 40, 133

Pianist .................................................. 57

Piano Roll ........................................... 101

Pop-up Time....................................... 153

power ..................................................... 9

Power Bass (CVP-98) .......................... 21

Punch In/Out recording ...................... 113

Quantize ....................................... 72, 123

Quick Recording................................. 107

Recall ................................................. 148

Record Edit functions ......................... 120

Registration .................................. 83, 139

Reverb Type List .................................. 42

Reverb.................................................. 41

Scale Tuning ...................................... 150

sections ................................................ 69

Send Channel .................................... 143

setting up................................................ 8

Single Finger .................................. 56, 58

Small Accompaniment

(SMALL ACMP) .............................. 65

Song Copy ......................................... 136

Song Delete ....................................... 138

Song Name ........................................ 121

Song Number ....................................... 88

Song Play (Guide mode) .................... 103

Song Play (Main).................................. 87

Song Play (Part) ................................... 92

Song Play (Repeat) .............................. 97

Song Play (Track Play) ........................ 91

Song playback...................................... 87

Song recording ................................... 105

Soundboard Depth (CVP-98) ............. 134

Sound Repeat .................................... 101

Split Point ....................................... 37, 61

Split ...................................................... 36

Start...................................... 50, 112, 115

Start/Stop ............................................. 89

Stop ...................................... 53, 113, 116

Style File disk ....................................... 80

Style File .............................................. 80

Style Name........................................... 73

Styles, selecting ................................... 47

Sync ................................................... 144

Synchro Stop........................................ 64

Tempo ...................................... 49, 54, 90

terminals/jacks ................................... 154

Track Delete ....................................... 123

Track Edit ........................................... 122

Track Mix............................................ 122

Track Recording ................................. 110

Transform ........................................... 142

Transpose .......................................... 130

Tune ................................................... 130

Virtual Arranger .................................... 64

Voices, selecting .................................. 27

Volume ................... 17, 49, 54, 60, 93, 94

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly

approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or

another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied

with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions.

Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use

this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable

level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environ-

ment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed

and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will

not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of

interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse)

circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the

antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type

cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you

can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation

of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena

Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not

correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your

plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the

three pin plug.

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

• Ceci ne s’applique qu’aux produits distribués par Yamaha Canada Musique Ltée.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE

BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLECTRIQUES,

INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA

BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER

JUSQU’AU FOND.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod-

uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre-

cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions,

Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions

found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, in-

cluding connection to the main supply.

2.Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are

manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area

where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt

exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact

your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable)

instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the

name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic

found in the Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug

(one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the

plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the

problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete

outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup-

plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any

power supply or adapter other than one described in the own-

ers manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by

Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other

objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any-

one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or

connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is

not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the

minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE:

The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling

capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri-

cian.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically

designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca-

tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc-

tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be

assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should

be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to

their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to

heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices

that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca-

tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam-

ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub,

sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components

supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the

manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all

safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory

product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from

the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex-

tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when

there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm

activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are

not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a

qualified service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or

b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or

c. The product has been exposed to rain; or

d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or

e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de-

scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing

should be referred to qualified service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli-

fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing

sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT

operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a

level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or

ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period

before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or acces-

sory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the

product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are de-

signed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that

benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are

well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are

designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK,

AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

92-469-2

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha

ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Nie-

derlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

NORTH AMERICA

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America,

Keyboard Division

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MIDDLE & SOUTH AMERICA

MEXICO

Yamaha De Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRASIL

Yamaha Musical Do Brasil LTDA.

Ave. Reboucas 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

PANAMA

Yamaha De Panama S.A.

Edificio Interseco, Calle Elvira Mendez no.10,

Piso 3, Oficina #105, Ciudad de Panama, Panama

Tel: 507-69-5311

OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES

AND CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America Corp.

6101 Blue Lagoon Drive, Miami, Florida 33126,

U.S.A.

Tel: 305-261-4111

EUROPE

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

AFRICA

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430

Tel: 053-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430

Tel: 053-460-2312

ASIA

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 730-1098

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor,

Malaysia

Tel: 3-717-8977

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

Blk 17A Toa Payoh #01-190 Lorong 7

Singapore 1231

Tel: 354-0133

TAIWAN

Kung Hsue She Trading Co., Ltd.

No. 322, Section 1, FuHsing S. Road,

Taipei 106, Taiwan. R.O.C.

Tel: 02-709-1266

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

865 Phornprapha Building, Rama I Road,

Patumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 2-215-3443

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430

Tel: 053-460-2317

OCEANIA

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,

Australia

Tel: 3-699-2388

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430

Tel: 053-460-2317

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430

Tel: 053-460-3273

[CL] 11

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain

Tel: 91-577-7270

PORTUGAL

Valentim de Carvalho CI SA

Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras,

Portugal

Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music

Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 0435 011

NORWAY

Narud Yamaha AS

Grini Næringspark 17

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 14 47 90

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of

Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

VY68800 709POCP15.2-03C0 Printed in Japan

Table of Contents

Messages ..................................................................2

Troubleshooting..........................................................6

MIDI and Data Compatibility ......................................8

MIDI Data Format ......................................................9

MIDI Implementation Chart ......................................25

Voice List..................................................................26

Drum/key Assignment List .......................................32

Style List ..................................................................34

Parameter Chart ......................................................35

Fingering Chart ........................................................36

Specifications...........................................................37

CVP-98/96: Assembly ..............................................38

Messages

● Common Messages

This prompt appears when there is no disk in the disk drive.

➾Put the proper disk in the drive and attempt the operation again.

When renaming the original song or converting the data this prompt will warn you in the

event that there is no song data.

➾Select a data-containing song, or insert a disk with song data into the floppy disk

drive.

This message appears if there is no Registration Memory, Micro Tuning, or related data

on the currently inserted disk when you attempt a file-related operation.

➾Create a file or insert a disk with a proper file.

This message appears when a new disk or a non-Clavinova formatted disk has been

inserted into the disk drive. (See page 106 in the Owner’s Manual.)

➾Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the

formatting process.

This message appears when you attempt to record or perform other file operations to a

disk whose write-protect tab is set to “write protect.”

➾Set the write-protect tab to the recordable position (page 7 in the Owner’s

Manual) then try the operation again. If the operation still cannot be performed,

the disk itself has internal write protection, making it impossible to perform record-

ing or file operations on the disk.

This message appears when you attempt to record over parts or perform other operations

on files that are incompatible or do not allow such operations. Depending on the file type,

operations such as additional recording, copying, deleting, etc. may not be possible on

the CVP-98/96.

An error occurred while writing to (as in recording or storing files) or reading from the disk.

➾Try the operation again after pressing the OK button. If the error occurs a second

time, the disk or the disk drive unit may be faulty. If you suspect the drive to be at

fault, refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.

This appears for a few seconds when a time consuming operation such as format, song

copy, etc. is finished.

This message appears when data is being transfered between the Clavinova and the

disk.

➾The message disappears automatically when the operation is finished.

When operations such as Song Delete or Format are selected, this prompts you to con-

firm whether you want to go ahead with the operation or not.

➾Press YES to execute the operation. Press NO to return to the previous display.

The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold any more data.

➾Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary data in the disk (page 138 in

the Owner’s Manual), or use a disk that has more available space. If this appears

during song recording, recording will stop and recorded data up to that point will

be saved automatically.

A 2DD and a 2HD disk can hold up to 60 song files each. A 2DD disk can hold about 110

files (of various types), and a 2HD disk can hold up to about 220 files.

This message appears when you try to produce more files than the disk is capable of

storing.

➾Press the OK button, then delete any unnecessary files in the disk (page 138 in

the Owner’s Manual), or use a disk that has more available space.

A file with the same name exists.

➾Press the OK button if you wish to overwrite the original file with new data, or

press CANCEL to abort the operation.

This message appears when you try to perform operations which cannot be done during

recording or playback, such as data conversion, etc.

➾Stop song recording or playback, or exit from the recording/playback mode, then

perform the operation again.

This appears when you try to execute operations that cannot be performed during play-

back, such as changing the number of repeats of the Guide function.

➾Stop song playback, or exit from the playback mode, then perform the operation

again.

A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed.

This message appears when you try to execute other operations while reading data from

the disk or saving data.

➾Wait until the data read/write operation is completed, then perform the operation

again.

This message appears when you attempt to execute another operation while writing ed-

ited data of a song recorded to internal RAM.

➾Complete the data write operation, then perform the other operation.

This message appears when executing an operation that results in deleting data recorded

to the internal RAM, such as playback of disk software.

➾Press YES to delete the data recorded to the internal RAM, then perform the de-

sired operation. Press the NO button if you want to keep the data.

This message appears when you attempt to record over or edit data of commercially

available software or data recorded on Clavinovas other than the CVP-94/92/98/96.

➾Press YES to convert the data for recording/editing on the CVP-94/92/98/96.

Press NO if you don’t want to convert the data.

This message informs you of the number of times the disks must be exchanged when

copying a song to a different disk before starting the song copy operation. (See page 137

in the Owner’s Manual.)

Insert the destination disk to be copied. (See page 137 in the Owner’s Manual.)

When copying a song from the source disk to another disk, this message prompts you to

specify the song number in the destination disk to which the song is to be copied, when

the disk is first inserted. (See page 137 in the Owner’s Manual.)

● Song Copy Related Messages

Messages

● Custom Style Related Messages

This message appears for a few seconds when the Custom Style mode is engaged. (See

page 68 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the beat parameter in the

Custom Style mode. (See page 70 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to change the number of measures

in the Custom Style mode. (See page 70 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to perform operations which can only

be done after deleting the part of the original style in the Custom Style mode. (See page

71 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt a store operation in the Custom

Style mode. (See page 74 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This also appears when you attempt to change styles before storing. (See page 79 in

the Owner’s Manual.)

This confirmation prompt appears when you attempt to exit from the Custom Style mode

before storing data. (See page 79 in the Owner’s Manual.)

➾

Select YES to store. Press NO to exit without storing data. Press CANCEL to return to

the previous display without storing data. (See page 79 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This message appears when the Recall Section operation in the Custom Style mode

cannot be performed, due to changes in the time signature (beat). (See page 74 in the

Owner’s Manual.)

If the data has not been stored to memory before saving to disk in the Custom Style

mode, this message prompts you to store the data before proceeding. (See page 76 in

the Owner’s Manual.)

This message appears if there is not enough internal memory space left when storing

data in the Custom Style mode. (See page 78 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This message appears when DELETE is selected from the display shown above.

➾Select the style to be deleted and press the OK button. Press CANCEL if you do

not want to delete the style.

This message appears when memory capacity has become full during recording in the

Custom Style mode (page 78 in the Owner’s Manual). This also appears when memory

has become full during recording of a song to internal RAM. In this case, recording will

stop and data recorded up to that point will be saved automatically.

This message prompts you to insert the source disk when copying songs to a second

disk. (See page 137 in the Owner’s Manual.)

This appears when the same song number is selected for both source and destination in

the song copy operation.

➾Change the destination song number.

● Recorded Data Conversion Related Messages

This message appears if a 2HD disk is used when performing conversion of the recorded data.

➾Press OK and copy the song data to be converted to a 2DD disk, then perform the

data conversion using the disk.

Following conversion of the song data, this message displays the song number to which

the data was saved.

● Initial Data Change Related Messages

This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Initial Edit function without

writing the data.

➾Press YES to write the changed data. Press NO to exit without writing. Press

CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit display without writing.

● Chord Sequence Related Messages

This confirmation message appears if you attempt to exit the Chord Sequence function

during recording.

➾Press YES to store the recorded data. Press NO to exit without storing. Press

CANCEL to return to the Chord Sequence display without storing.

This message appears during Chord Sequence recording when you attempt to enter an ac-

companiment style or section change at a position other than the beginning of a measure.

➾Record changes of accompaniment style or section only at the beginning of the

measure. (See page 118 in the Owner’s Manual.)

Messages

● Style File Load Related Messages

This message appears when you attempt to load a Style file without there being enough

memory to hold the specified file. (See page 82 in the Owner’s Manual.)

Some Style Files are too large to be handled by the LISTEN feature in the Style File Load

function. (See page 81 in the Owner’s Manual.)

● Other Messages

This message appears when the host computer is not turned on, the connecting cable is

not properly connected, or the sequencing software is not active. In this case, turn the

power off on both the CVP-98/96 and the computer, and check the cable connection.

Once the connection is secure, turn the power of the computer on first, then the CVP-98/

96, to check if the driver and MIDI application function properly.

As long as the Clavinova is regularly used, data is retained in memory. If the instrument

is left unused for a week or longer before being turned on again, the data is erased and

this message appears. This message also appears when you recall all factory data.

(See page 147 in the Owner’s Manual.)

A problem has been detected in the hardware system during power on.

➾Refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.

The disk head is dirty. Clean the disk head using a commercially available head cleaning

disk.

Troubleshooting

Problem

The power of the CVP-98/96 does

not turn on.

A click or pop sound is produced

when turning on/off the power.

The LCD display is too bright or

too dark to read.

The pop-up display does not open.

The keyboard sound volume is low

compared to that of the Auto Ac-

companiment or disk playback.

The sound of the Auto Accompani-

ment or disk playback is low com-

pared to that of the keyboard.

The entire sound is low or no sound

comes out.

The damper pedal has no effect, or

the sound continuously sustains

even when the damper pedal is not

pressed.

Auto Accompaniment or disk play-

back does not start.

When the keyboard is played, not

all of the notes sound.

Auto Accompaniment does not play

back.

Solution

Securely insert one of the cable

plugs into the instrument itself, and

the other plug into a proper AC

outlet.

This is normal, and is no cause for

concern.

Adjust the contrast of the display by

using the [CONTRAST] control. (See

page 15 in the Owner’s Manual.)

Press the [DISPLAY HOLD] but-

ton so that the lamp goes out. (See

page 15 in the Owner’s Manual.)

Raise the volume of the keyboard per-

formance in the Mixer display. (See

page 94 in the Owner’s Manual.)

Raise the [ACMP/SONG VOL-

UME] level.

Raise the [MASTER VOLUME].

Unplug the headphones.

Set Local Control to on. (See page

144 in the Owner’s Manual.)

Securely insert the pedal cord plug

into the proper jack. (See page 40

in this Manual.)

Set MIDI Sync to “INT.”. (See

page 144 in the Owner’s Manual.)

The tone generation system is

configured such that later notes

have priority, occasionally resulting

in previous notes being cut off. See

the “Specifications” section on page

37 in this Manual for information

on the simultaneous polyphonic

capacity.

Press the [ACMP ON] button to

turn on Auto Accompaniment.

Cause

The power cable plugs are not in-

serted either in the CVP-98/96 or a

proper AC outlet.

Electrical current is flowing into the

instrument.

The brightness may be changed by

the surrounding temperature.

The [DISPLAY HOLD] lamp is lit.

The independent volume level of the

keyboard performance sound is too

low.

The [ACMP/SONG VOLUME] is

low.

The [MASTER VOLUME] is low.

Headphones are connected.

Local Control is set to off.

The pedal cord plug is not connected.

MIDI Sync is set to “EXT.”.

Notes have been played beyond the

total simultaneous polyphonic capac-

ity (maximum number of notes).

Auto Accompaniment is not turned

on.

The desired chord cannot be recog-

nized or output by the Auto Accom-

paniment.

The maximum of 60 songs cannot

be recorded.

Some tracks do not played back

when playing back data.

The keys are not being played cor-

rectly.

The keys are not being played ac-

cording to the selected Auto Accom-

paniment type.

The memory capacity is full because

the playing time of one or more

songs is long, or many functions

were used.

Playback of the track(s) is set to off.

Refer to the “Fingering Chart”

(page 36 in this Manual).

Check the Auto Accompaniment

type, and play the keys according to

the selected type. (See page 56 in

the Owner’s Manual.)

Delete unnecessary songs (page 138

in the Owner’s Manual) or record to

a new disk.

Set playback for the non-sounding

tracks to on. (See pages 91 and 94

in the Owner’s Manual.)

Problem SolutionCause

* If a “Hardware Error!” message appears in the display when turning on the power, con-

tact your local Yamaha dealer immediately, since this indicates some sort of internal dam-

age to the instrument.

Troubleshooting

MIDI and Data Compatibility

■ MIDI

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a worldwide

standard communication interface that allows MIDI-compatible

musical instruments and equipment to share musical information

and control one another.

• Depending on the MIDI device, the transmittable/receivable data

differs, and only data which is commonly recognized among the

connected MIDI devices can be transmitted or received. You

can check whether your instrument supports certain data types

by referring to the MIDI Implementation Chart in the owner’s

manual for that instrument. The MIDI Implementation Chart for

the CVP-98/96 is found on page 25 in this Manual.

MIDI Terminals

● Sequence Format

The system which records song data is called “sequence for-

mat.”

• Playback is only possible when the sequence format of the

disk matches that of the MIDI device.

[Common Sequence Formats]

SMF (Standard MIDI File)

This is the most common sequence format.

• Standard MIDI Files are generally available as one of two

types: Format 0 or Format 1.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with Format 0, and most

commercially available software is recorded as Format 0.

• The CVP-98/96 is compatible with both Format 0 and For-

mat 1 (for Format 1, up to a maximum of 17 chunks).

• Song data recorded on the CVP-98/96 is automatically re-

corded as SMF Format 0.

ESEQ

This sequence format is compatible with many of Yamaha’s

MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instruments.

This is a common format used with various Yamaha software.

• The CVP-98/96 is compatible with ESEQ.

● Voice Allocation Format

With MIDI, voices are assigned to specific numbers, called

“program numbers.” The numbering standard (order of voice

allocation) is referred to as the “voice allocation format.”

• Voices may not play back as expected unless the voice allo-

cation format of the song data matches that of the compat-

ible MIDI device used for playback.

[Main Voice Allocation Formats]

GM System Level 1

This is one of the most common voice allocation formats.

• Many MIDI devices are compatible with GM System Level

1, as is most commercially available software.

• The CVP-98/96 is compatible with GM System Level 1.

XG is a major enhancement of the GM System Level 1 format,

and was developed by Yamaha specifically to provide more

voices and variations, as well as greater expressive control over

voices and effects, and to ensure compatibility of data well into

the future.

• The CVP-98/96 is compatible with XG.

• Song data recorded on the CVP-98/96 is automatically given

XG voice allocation.

DOC

This voice allocation format is compaible with many of

Yamaha’s MIDI devices, including the Clavinova series instru-

ments.

This is also a common format used with various Yamaha soft-

ware.

• The CVP-98/96 is compatible with DOC.

Even if the devices and data used satisfy all the conditions

above, the data may still not be completely compatible, depend-

ing on the specifications of the devices and particular data re-

cording methods.

MIDI Cable

Connect MIDI devices with special MIDI cables.

• The various MIDI settings can be made from the Function

section’s MIDI 1 - 3 pages.

• Further information on MIDI and its applications is avail-

able in various music books and magazines.

■ Data Compatibility

This section covers basic information on data compatibility:

whether or not other MIDI devices can playback the data recorded

by CVP-98/96, and whether or not the CVP-98/96 can playback

commercially available song data or song data created for other

instruments or on a computer.

Depending on the MIDI device or data characteristics, you may

be able to play back the data without any problem, or you may have

to perform some special operations before the data can be played

back. If you run into problems playing back data, please refer to the

information below.

● Basic Check Points

The data and the MIDI device must match in regards to the

items below.

• Disk Format

• Sequence format

• Voice allocation format

● Disk format

Floppy disks are the main storage medium for data used with

various devices, including computers. Different devices have

different systems of storing data, therefore it is necessary to first

configure the floppy disk to the system of the device being used.

This operation is called “formatting.”

• There are two types of floppy disks: MF2DD (double sided,

double density) and MF2HD (double sided, high density),

and each type has different formatting systems.

• CVP-98/96 can record and playback with both types of

floppy disks.

• When formatted by the CVP-98/96, a 2DD disk stores up to

720 KB (kilobytes) and a 2HD disk stores up to 1.44 MB

(megabytes). (The figures “720 KB” and “1.44 MB” indi-

cate the data memory capacity. They are also used to indi-

cate the format type of disk.)

• Playback is only possible when the MIDI device to be used

is compatible with the format of the disk.

This terminal transmits the MIDI data.

This terminal

receives the MIDI

data.

OUT

THRU

MIDI

Data received via the

MIDI IN terminal is re-

transmitted unchanged

through this terminal.

(2) RECEIVE FLOW

MIDI→KEY OFF 8nH

KEY ON/OFF 9nH

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

MODULATION BnH,01H

PORTAMENTO TIME BnH,05H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

PORTAMENTO BnH,41H

SOSTENUTO BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

HARMONIC CONTENT BnH,47H

RELEASE TIME BnH,48H

ATTACK TIME BnH,49H

BRIGHTNESS BnH,4AH

PORTAMENTO CONTROL BnH,54H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

CHORUS SEND LEVEL BnH,5DH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

DATA INCREMENT BnH,60H

DATA DECREMENT BnH,61H

NRPN LSB BnH,62H

NRPN MSB BnH,63H

VIBRATO RATE BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DEPTH BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DELAY BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH

FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH

AEG RELEASE BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH

DRUM INST *1

CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0 00 0000 0000

1 01 0000 0001

2 02 0000 0010

3 03 0000 0011

4 04 0000 0100

5 05 0000 0101

6 06 0000 0110

7 07 0000 0111

8 08 0000 1000

9 09 0000 1001

10 0A 0000 1010

11 0B 0000 1011

12 0C 0000 1100

13 0D 0000 1101

14 0E 0000 1110

15 0F 0000 1111

16 10 0001 0000

17 11 0001 0001

18 12 0001 0010

19 13 0001 0011

20 14 0001 0100

21 15 0001 0101

22 16 0001 0110

23 17 0001 0111

24 18 0001 1000

25 19 0001 1001

26 1A 0001 1010

27 1B 0001 1011

28 1C 0001 1100

29 1D 0001 1101

30 1E 0001 1110

31 1F 0001 1111

32 20 0010 0000

33 21 0010 0001

34 22 0010 0010

35 23 0010 0011

36 24 0010 0100

37 25 0010 0101

38 26 0010 0110

39 27 0010 0111

40 28 0010 1000

41 29 0010 1001

42 2A 0010 1010

43 2B 0010 1011

44 2C 0010 1100

45 2D 0010 1101

46 2E 0010 1110

47 2F 0010 1111

48 30 0011 0000

49 31 0011 0001

50 32 0011 0010

51 33 0011 0011

52 34 0011 0100

53 35 0011 0101

54 36 0011 0110

55 37 0011 0111

56 38 0011 1000

57 39 0011 1001

58 3A 0011 1010

59 3B 0011 1011

60 3C 0011 1100

61 3D 0011 1101

62 3E 0011 1110

63 3F 0011 1111

64 40 0100 0000

65 41 0100 0001

66 42 0100 0010

67 43 0100 0011

68 44 0100 0100

69 45 0100 0101

70 46 0100 0110

71 47 0100 0111

72 48 0100 1000

73 49 0100 1001

74 4A 0100 1010

75 4B 0100 1011

76 4C 0100 1100

77 4D 0100 1101

78 4E 0100 1110

79 4F 0100 1111

80 50 0101 0000

81 51 0101 0001

82 52 0101 0010

83 53 0101 0011

84 54 0101 0100

85 55 0101 0101

86 56 0101 0110

87 57 0101 0111

88 58 0101 1000

89 59 0101 1001

90 5A 0101 1010

91 5B 0101 1011

92 5C 0101 1100

93 5D 0101 1101

94 5E 0101 1110

95 5F 0101 1111

96 60 0110 0000

97 61 0110 0001

98 62 0110 0010

99 63 0110 0011

100 64 0110 0100

101 65 0110 0101

102 66 0110 0110

103 67 0110 0111

104 68 0110 1000

105 69 0110 1001

106 6A 0110 1010

107 6B 0110 1011

108 6C 0110 1100

109 6D 0110 1101

110 6E 0110 1110

111 6F 0110 1111

112 70 0111 0000

113 71 0111 0001

114 72 0111 0010

115 73 0111 0011

116 74 0111 0100

117 75 0111 0101

118 76 0111 0110

119 77 0111 0111

120 78 0111 1000

121 79 0111 1001

122 7A 0111 1010

123 7B 0111 1011

124 7C 0111 1100

125 7D 0111 1101

126 7E 0111 1110

127 7F 0111 1111

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal

numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers

may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined as any

whole number.

To enter data/values, refer to the table below.

• Except the table above, for example 144-159(decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001

1111(binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176-191/

BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for each

channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the Program

Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000 denotes the

start of a System Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111 denotes the end of

a System Exclusive Message.

•aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address

contains High, Mid, and Low.

•bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.

•ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.

•ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW

MIDI←KEY ON/OFF 9nH

OUT

CONTROL CHANGE BnH

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

SOSTENUTE BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

MIDI Data Format

AEG ATTACK RATE BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY RATE BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PITCH COARSE BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PITCH FINE BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

LEVEL BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PANPOT BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

REVERB SEND BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

CHORUS SEND BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

VARIATION SEND BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

RPN LSB BnH,64H

RPN MSB BnH,65H

PITCH BEND SENS. BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH

FINE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH,

26H,llH

COARSE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH

NULL BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH

ALL SOUND OFF BnH,78H,00H

RESET ALL CONTROLLERS BnH,79H,00H

ALL NOTES OFF BnH,7BH,00H

OMNI OFF BnH,7CH,00H

OMNI ON BnH,7DH,00H

MONO BnH,7EH

POLY BnH,7FH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH DnH

PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

PARAMETER REQUEST F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

DUMP REQUEST F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence

P = 1 SFX1 Kit

P = 2 SFX2 Kit

When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM

VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the

new DRUM VOICE.

(3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Recive only)

STATUS 1101nnnn(DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE

(3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE

STATUS 1110nnnn(EnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

LSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB

MSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB

(3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv

* Transmit CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94

VARIATION SEND LEVEL

; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection = 1[System])

* Receive CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3

c = 1 MODULATION ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 5 PORTAMENTO TIME ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 65 PORTAMENTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 71 HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 72 RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 73 ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 74 BRIGHTNESS ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 84 PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 93 CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94

VARIATION SEND LEVEL

; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection = 1[System])

c = 96 DATA INCREMENT ; v = 127 *1

c = 97 DATA DECREMENT ; v = 127 *1

*1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN, NRPN.

*2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice.

*3 MSB=0, anything other than 63 is 0.

• Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT

operation will be suspended. When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is

changed, set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message, and

transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT MSB, LSB, PROGRAM

CHANGE.

• MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth.

• PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the

Portamento Switch = ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the

longest.

(3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES

(3-1-1) KEY OFF(Recive only)

STATUS 1000nnnn(8nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv v: ignored

(3-1-2) KEY ON/OFF

STATUS 1001nnnn(9nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv (v ≠ 0) NOTE ON

00000000 (v = 0) NOTE OFF

(3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE

STATUS 1100nnnn(CnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp p = 0 - 127

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence

P = 0 Standard Kit

P = 1 Standard2 Kit

P = 8 Room Kit

P = 16 Rock Kit

P = 24 Elctrnic Kit

P = 25 Analog Kit

P = 27 Dance Kit

P = 32 Jazz Kit

P = 40 Brush Kit

P = 48 Classic Kit

MIDI Data Format

• PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in

relation to the preset value.

• Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is

used.

• HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that

is set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the

value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. As values get higher the sound

becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective

parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.

• RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by

the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment.

• ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the

voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment.

• BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the

voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For

some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal

parameter range.

(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc c = CONTROL NUMBER

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = DATA VALUE

(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On

conditions established by Channel Messages.

(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Resets controllers as follows.

PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 (Center)

AFTER TOUCH 0 (min.)

MODULATION 0 (min.)

EXPRESSION 127 (max.)

SUSTAIN 0 (off)

SOSTENUTO 0 (off)

SOFT PEDAL 0 (off)

NRPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

RPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

PORTAMENT CONTROL Resets portamento source note number

PORTAMENTO 0 (off)

(3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes. However, any notes being held by SUSTAIN

or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off.

(3-2-4) OMNI OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(3-2-5) OMNI ON (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed.

(3-2-6) MONO (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the

corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 (m=1).

(3-2-7) POLY (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be

changed to Mode 3.

(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER(RPN)

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

RPN LSB 01100100(64H)

RPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = RPN LSB(refer to the list below)

RPN MSB 01100101(65H)

RPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = RPN MSB(refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110(06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

DATA ENTRY LSB 00100110(26H)

DATA VALUE 0lllllll l = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for

data entry MSB/LSB.

RPN D.ENTRY

LSB MSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

00H 00H mmH — PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)

01H 00H mmH llH FINE TUNE

{mmH,llH} = {00H,00H} - {40H,00H} - {7FH,7FH}

(-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192)

02H 00H mmH — COARSE TUNE 28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)

7FH 7FH — — NULL

Clears the current RPN number setting. Does not change the internal parameter settings.

(3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER(NRPN) (Recive only)

STATUS 1011nnnn(BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NRPN LSB 01100010(62H)

NRPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = NRPN LSB(refer to the list below)

NRPN MSB 01100011(63H)

NRPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = NRPN MSB(refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110(06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data entry

MSB/LSB.

NRPN D.ENTRY

MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

01H 08H mmH — VIBRATO RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 09H mmH — VIBRATO DEPTH 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 0AH mmH — VIBRATO DELAY 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 20H mmH —

FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 21H mmH — FILTER RESONANCE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 63H mmH — EG ATTACK TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 64H mmH — EG DECAY TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 66H mmH — EG RELEASE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

14H rrH mmH —

DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

15H rrH mmH —

DRUM FILTER RESONANCE

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

16H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

17H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG DECAY RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

18H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH COARSE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

19H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH FINE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

1AH rrH mmH — DRUM LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1CH rrH mmH — DRUM PANPOT 00H ,01H - 40H - 7FH

(random,left - center - right)

1DH rrH mmH —

DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1EH rrH mmH —

DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1FH rrH mmH —

DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set with a drum

voice.

rrH : drum instrument note number

(3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

(3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK

STATUS 11111000 (F8H)

Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted.

Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the

external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure

received from the external device.

Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will

be used.

(3-5-2) START

STATUS 11111010 (FAH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is started.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

start.

(3-5-3) STOP

STATUS 11111100 (FCH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

stop.

(3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING

STATUS 11111110 (FEH)

Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.

Reception: Sensing is started once this Code is received. If Status or Data is not

received within 400ms, the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared, and all notes,

including those being sustained, will be cut OFF. Also, all control values will be reset

to their factory defaults.

(3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

(3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT

(3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 00

0sssssss SS Switch No.

00H : INTRO A

01H~07H : INTRO B

08H : MAIN A

09H~0FH : MAIN B

10H : FILL IN AA

11H~17H : FILL IN BB

18H : FILL IN AB

19H~1FH : FILL IN BA

20H : ENDING A

21H~27H : ENDING B

0ddddddd DD Switch On/Off: 00H(Off),7FH(On)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed.

(3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 01

0ttttttt TT Tempo4

0ttttttt TT Tempo3

0ttttttt TT Tempo2

0ttttttt TT Tempo1

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value.

Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits

going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits).

(3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

(3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7F Universal Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7F Universal Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously.

The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.)

(3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG.

Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

(3-6-3) XG STANDARD

(3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE

(3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

00000000 00 Address High

00000000 00 Address Mid

01111110 7E Address Low

00000000 00 Data

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to

XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System

values denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the

table.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

(3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes.

For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > (page 14) and

< Table 1-4 > ~ < Table 1-8 > (pages 15-19).

The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received.

(These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received.)

XG System Data

Multi Effect Data

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0bbbbbbb BB ByteCount

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

0ccccccc CC Check sum

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 >

(pages 14-19).

The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and

Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.

If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request

will be received.

The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size.

MIDI Data Format

The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received.

(These are transmitted only after a Bulk Dump request is received.)

System Data

Multi Effect Data(Individual effect unit)

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data(Individual part unit)

Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit)

System Information(Individual only)

(3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0011nnnn 3n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > (page 14) and

< Table 1-4 > ~ < Table 1-8 > (pages 15-19).

The 4 data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect Data

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to

< Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-8 >

(pages 14-19).

The 5 data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect Data(Individual module unit)

Multi EQ Data

Multi Part Data(Individual part unit)

Drums Setup Data(Individual note unit)

System Information

(3-6-4) CLAVINOVA MIDI COMPLIANCE

(3-6-4-1) INTERNAL CLOCK / EXTERNAL CLOCK (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

00000001 01 Clavinova common ID

0000001n 0N N: 2(Internal Clock),3(External Clock)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-4-2) DOC MULTI TIMBRE ON / OFF (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

00000001 01 Clavinova commmon ID

00000110 1N

N: 3(DOC Multi Timbre Off),4(DOC Multi Timbre On)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-4-3) PANEL LED ON / OFF (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 45 CVP-98/96/94/92

00011010 1A PANEL LED On/Off

0mmmmmmm MM

MM: 00H(LED Off),01H(LED On),02H(The LED flashes)

03H (LED All off), 04H (Panel LED returns to

normal operation)

00000000 00

0nnnnnnn NN LED No.

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Remotely switches the Panel LED On/Off.

(3-6-4-4) STYLE NUMBER

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 45 CVP-98/96/94/92

00011101 1D Style No.

00000000 00

0ccccccc CC Style No. MSB

0ddddddd DD Style No. LSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-4-5) MIDI FA CANCEL (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 01 Clavinova common ID

01100001 61 MIDI FA Cancel

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

If this message is received, even if FAH is received the Rhythm will not start.

(3-6-5) SPECIAL OPERATORS

(3-6-5-1) SPLIT POINT

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 01 Clavinova common ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

00000000 00

00010100 14 Split Point

0ddddddd DD Split Key No.

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-5-2) FINGERING

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 01 Clavinova common ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

00000000 00

01000000 40 Fingering

0000dddd 0D 0D: 00H(Off),01H(Single Finger),02H(Fingered),

04H(Full Keyboard),07H(Multi Finger)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-5-3) ACCOMP VOLUME

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 01 Clavinova common ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N Part: 00H(All Part),05H(Rhythm),0AH(Bass),

06H(Chord),0DH(Pad),07H(Phrase)

01000000 42 Accomp Volume

0ddddddd DD Volume Data: 00H~7FH

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-5-4) CHANNEL DETUNE

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 45 CVP-98/96/94/92 ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N N = MIDI Channel

01000011 43 Dual Detune

0vvvvvvv VV Value VV: 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The Channel Detune message only affects the specified channel.

(3-6-5-5) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 45 CVP-98/96/94/92 ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N N = MIDI Channel

01001001 45 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off

0vvvvvvv VV Value VV: off=7FH, on=00H

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN changes are only

valid after the reception of the next key on. Normal operation resumes when “Off” is

received.

(3-6-5-6) MIDI KEY LED MODE ON / OFF (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 01

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N N = MIDI Channel

01000111 47 MIDI Key LED Mode On / Off

0ddddddd DD

DD: 00H(Key LED Mode Off),01H(Key LED Mode On + no tone),

02H(Key LED Mode On + tone)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

(3-6-6) Others

(3-6-6-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

00100111 27 Model ID

00110000 30 Sub ID

00000000 00

0mmmmmmm MM Master Tune MSB

0lllllll LL Master Tune LSB

0ccccccc CC don’t care

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.

MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value.

T = M-128

T : Tuning value (-99cent - +99cent)

M : A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB, bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB.

In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset.

< Table 1-1>

Parmeter Basic Address

Parameter Change

Address

(H) (M) (L) Description

SYSTEM 00 00 00 System

00 00 7D Drum Setup Reset

00 00 7E XG System On

00 00 7F All Parameter Reset

INFORMATION 01 00 00 System Information

EFFECT 1 02 01 00 Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation )

MULTI PART 08 00 00 Multi Part 1

08 0F 00 Multi Part 16

08 10 00 Reserved

::: :

DRUM 30 0D 00 Drum Setup 1 → Address Parameter

31 0D 00 Drum Setup 2 : :

3n 0D 00 note number 13

32 0D 00 Reserved 3n 0E 00 note number 14

::: : ::

3F nn nn Reserved 3n 5B 00 note number 91

< Table 1-2 >

MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM )

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

00 00 00 4 0000 Master Tune -102.4..+102.3[cent] 00 04 00 00

01 ..07FF 1st bit3-0 -> bit15-12 (0400)

02 2nd bit3-0 -> bit11-8 (With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)

03 3rd bit3-0 -> bit7-4

4th bit3-0 -> bit3-0

04 1 00..7F Master Volume 0..127 7F

05 1 Not Used

06 1 28..58 Transpose -24..+24[semitones] 40

7D n Drum Setup Reset n=Drum Setup Number

7E 00 XG System On 00=XG Sytem on

7F 00 All Parameter Reset 00=on (receive only)

TOTAL SIZE 6

MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-3 >

MIDI Parameter table ( System information )

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description

(H) (H) (H)

01 00 00 E 20..7F Model Name 32..127(ASCII)

0E 1 00

0F 1 00

TOTAL SIZE 10

(Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

< Table 1-4 >

MIDI Parameter Change table ( EFFECT 1)

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

02 01 00 2 00..7F Reverb Type MSB Refer to the Effect Type List 01(=HALL1)

00..7F Reverb Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

02 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

03 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

04 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

05 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

06 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

07 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

08 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

09 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0A 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0B 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0C 1 00..7F Reverb Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 60

0D 1 01..7F Reverb Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

TOTAL SIZE 0E

02 01 10 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

11 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

12 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

13 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

14 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

15 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 20 2 00..7F Chorus Type MSB Refer to the Effect Type List 41(=Chorus1)

00..7F Chorus Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

22 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

23 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

24 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

25 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

26 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

27 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

28 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

29 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2A 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2B 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2C 1 00..7F Chorus Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 60

2D 1 01..7F Chorus Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

2E 1 00..7F Send Chorus To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

TOTAL SIZE 0F

02 01 30 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

31 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

32 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

33 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

34 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

35 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 40 2 00..7F Variation Type MSB Refer to the Effect Type List “05(=DELAY L,C,R)”

00..7F Variation Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

42 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 1 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 1 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

44 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 2 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 2 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

46 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 3 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 3 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

48 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 4 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 4 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4A 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 5 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 5 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4C 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 6 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 6 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4E 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 7 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 7 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

50 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 8 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 8 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

52 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 9 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 9 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

54 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 10 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 10 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

56 1 00..7F Variation Return -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 60

57 1 01..7F Variation Pan L63..C..R63(1..64..127) 40

58 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

59 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Chorus -∞..0..+6dB(0..96..127) 00

5A 1 00..01 Variation Connection 0:insertion,1:system 00

5B 1 00..1F Variation Part part1..32(0..31),off(127) 7F

5C 1 01..7F MW Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5D 1 01..7F PB Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5E 1 01..7F CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5F 1 01..7F Not Used

60 1 01..7F Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 21

02 01 70 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 11 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

71 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 12 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

72 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 13 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

73 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 14 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

74 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 15 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

75 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 16 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

< Table 1-5 >

MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI EQ )

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

02 40 00 1 34..4C EQ Type 0:FLAT 0

1:JAZZ

2:POPS

3:ROCK

4:CLASSIC

01 1 34..4C EQ Gain1 -12..+12[dB] 40

02 1 04..28 EQ Frequency1 32..2000[Hz] 0C

03 1 01..78 EQ Q1 0.1..12.0 07

04 1 00..01 EQ Shape1 00:Shelving,01:Peaking 00

05 1 34..4C EQ Gain2 -12..+12[dB] 40

06 1 0E..36 EQ Frequency2 0.1..10[KHz] 1C

07 1 01..78 EQ Q2 0.1..12.0 07

08 1 Not Used

09 1 34..4C EQ Gain3 -12..+12[dB] 40

0A 1 0E..36 EQ Frequency3 0.1..10[KHz] 22

0B 1 01..78 EQ Q3 0.1..12.0 07

0C 1 Not Used

0D 1 34..4C EQ Gain4 -12..+12[dB] 40

0E 1 0E..36 EQ Frequency4 0.1..10[KHz] 2E

0F 1 01..78 EQ Q4 0.1..12.0 07

10 1 Not Used

11 1 34..4C EQ Gain5 -12..+12[dB] 40

12 1 1C..3A EQ Frequency5 0.5..16.0[KHz] 3C

13 1 01..78 EQ Q5 0.1..12.0 07

14 1 00..01 EQ Shape5 00:Shelving,01:Peaking 00

TOTAL SIZE 15

< Table 1-6 >

MIDI Parameter Change table ( EFFECT 2 )

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

03 00 00 2 00..7F Insertion Type MSB Refer to the Ef. Type List “49(=DISTORTION)”

00..7F Insertion Type LSB 00 : basic type 00

02 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter1 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter2 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

04 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter3 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

MIDI Data Format

05 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter4 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

06 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter5 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

07 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter6 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

08 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter7 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

09 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter8 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

0A 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter9 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

0B 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter10 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

0C 1 00..7F Insertion Part Part1..16,OFF 7F

0D 1 00..7F MW INS CTRL DPT

0E 1 00..7F BEND INS CTRL DPT

0F 1 00..7F CAT INS CTRL DPT

10 1 00..7F Not Used

11 1 00..7F Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 12

03 00 20 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter11 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

21 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter12 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

22 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter13 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

23 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter14 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

24 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter15 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

25 1 00..7F Insertion Parameter16 Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

TOTAL SIZE 06

03 00 30 2 00..7F Ins. Param.1 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.1 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 32 2 00..7F Ins. Param.2 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.2 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 34 2 00..7F Ins. Param.3 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.3 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 36 2 00..7F Ins. Param.4 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.4 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 38 2 00..7F Ins. Param.5 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.5 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 3A 2 00..7F Ins. Param.6 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.6 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 3C 2 00..7F Ins. Param.7 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.7 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 3E 2 00..7F Ins. Param.8 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.8 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 40 2 00..7F Ins. Param.9 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.9 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

03 00 42 2 00..7F Ins. Param.10 MSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

00..7F Ins. Param.10 LSB Refer to the Ef. Parameter List Depend on Ins. Type

TOTAL SIZE 14

For effect types that do not require MSB, the Parameters for Address 02-0B will be received. Address 30-42 will not be received.

For effect types that require MSB, the Parameters for Address 30-42 will be received. Address 02-0B will not be received.

When Bulk Dumps that include Effect Type data are transmitted, the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will always be transmitted. But, effects that require MSB, when the bulk dump is

received the Parameters for Address 02 - 0B will not be received.

< Table 1-7 >

MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI PART )

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

08 nn 00 1 00..20 Element Reserve 0..32 0(Part10),2(Others)

nn 01 1 00..7F Bank Select MSB 0..127 7F(Part10),00(Others)

nn 02 1 00..7F Bank Select LSB 0..127 00

nn 03 1 00..7F Program Number 1..128 00

nn 04 1 00..0F, Rcv Channel 0..16;1..16,127;off Part No.

nn 05 1 00..01 Mono/Poly Mode 0:mono,1:poly 01

nn 06 1 00..02 Same Note Number 0:single 00

Key On Assign 1:multi

2:inst (for DRUM)

nn 07 1 00..02 Part Mode 0:normal 00 (Except Part10)

1..3:drum thru,drum1..2 01 (Part10)

nn 08 1 28..58 Note Shift -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 09 2 00..FF Detune -12.8..+12.7[Hz] 08 00

nn 0A 1st bit3..0 -> bit7..4 (80)

2nd bit3..0 -> bit3..0

nn 0B 1 00..7F Volume 0..127 64

nn 0C 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Depth 0..127 40

nn 0D 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Offset 0..127 40

nn 0E 1 00..7F Pan 0:random 40

L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

nn 0F 1 00..7F Note Limit Low C-2..G8 00

nn 10 1 00..7F Note Limit High C-2..G8 7F

nn 11 1 00..7F Dry Level 0..127 7F

nn 12 1 00..7F Chorus Send 0..127 00

nn 13 1 00..7F Reverb Send 0..127 28

nn 14 1 00..7F Variation Send 0..127 00

nn 15 1 00..7F Vibrato Rate -64..+63 40

nn 16 1 00..7F Vibrato Depth -64..+63 40

nn 17 1 00..7F Vibrato Delay -64..+63 40

nn 18 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..+63 40

nn 19 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..+63 40

nn 1A 1 00..7F EG Attack Time -64..+63 40

nn 1B 1 00..7F EG Decay Time -64..+63 40

nn 1C 1 00..7F EG Release Time -64..+63 40

nn 1D 1 28..58 MW Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 1E 1 00..7F MW Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 1F 1 00..7F MW Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 20 1 00..7F MW LFO PMod Depth 0..127 0A

nn 21 1 00..7F MW LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 22 1 00..7F MW LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 23 1 28..58 Bend Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 42

nn 24 1 00..7F Bend Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 25 1 00..7F Bend Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 26 1 00..7F Bend LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 27 1 00..7F Bend LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 28 1 00..7F Bend LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

TOTAL SIZE 29

nn 30 Not Used

nn 40 Not Used

nn 41 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 42 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 43 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 44 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 45 1 00..7F Scale Tuning E -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 46 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 47 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 48 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 49 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4A 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4B 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4C 1 00..7F Scale Tuning B -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4D 1 28..58 CAT Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 4E 1 00..7F CAT Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 4F 1 00..7F CAT Amplitude Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 50 1 00..7F CAT LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 51 1 00..7F CAT LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 52 1 00..7F CAT LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 53 Not Used

66 Not Used

nn 67 1 00..01 Portamento Switch off/on 00

nn 68 1 00..7F Portamento Time 0..127 00

nn 69 Not Used

6E Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 3F

nn = PartNumber

If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.

• Bank Select LSB

• Amp EG

• Portamento

• Soft Pedal

• Mono/Poly

• Scale Tuning

MIDI Data Format

XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT

Same as LSB=0

XG OPTION EFFECT

REVERB TYPE

* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, The LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.

* Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”.

CHORUS TYPE

MIDI Parameter Change table ( DRUM SETUP )

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value(H)

3n rr 00 1 00..7F Pitch Coarse -64..+63 40

3n rr 01 1 00..7F Pitch Fine -64..+63[cent] 40

3n rr 02 1 00..7F Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 03 1 00..7F Alternate Group 0:off,1..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 04 1 00..7F Pan 0:random Depend on the Note

L63..C..R63(1..64..127)

3n rr 05 1 00..7F Reverb Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 06 1 00..7F Chorus Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 07 1 00..7F Variation Send Level 0..127 7F

3n rr 08 1 00..01 Key Assign 0:single,1:multi 00

3n rr 09 1 00..01 Rcv Note Off off/on Depend on the Note

3n rr 0A 1 00..01 Rcv Note On off/on 01

3n rr 0B 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..63 40

3n rr 0C 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..63 40

3n rr 0D 1 00..7F EG Attack Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0E 1 00..7F EG Decay1 Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0F 1 00..7F EG Decay2 Rate -64..63 40

TOTAL SIZE 10

n:Drum Setup Number(0 - 1)

rr:note number(0DH - 54H)

If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.

According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

< Table 1-9 > Effect Type List

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03..07 08 09..15 16 17 18 19 20 21..

000 NO EFFECT

001 [1]HALL1 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 [4]HALL4 [5]HALL5

002 [6]ROOM1 ROOM2 [7]ROOM2 [8]ROOM3 ROOM ROOM [9]ROOM4

003 [10]STAGE1 [11]STAGE2 STAGE [12]STAGE3

004 [13]PLATE PLATE PLATE

005..015 NO EFFECT

016 [14]WHITE ROOM

017 [15]TUNNEL

018 CANYON

019 [16]BASEMENT

020..127 NO EFFECT

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03..07 08 09..15 16 17 18 19 20 21..

000 NO EFFECT

001..064 NO EFFECT

065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4

066 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE3 CELESTE4 CELESTE CELESTE

067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 FLANGER FLANGER

068 SYMPHONIC

069..071 NO EFFECT

072 PHASER 1

073..086 NO EFFECT

087

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

088..127 NO EFFECT

VARIATION EFFECT TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03..07 08 09..15 16 17 18 19 20 21..

000 NO EFFECT

001 [1]HALL1 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 HALL HALL

002 [4]ROOM1 ROOM2 [5]ROOM2 [6]ROOM3 ROOM ROOM ROOM

003 [7]STAGE1 [8]STAGE2 STAGE [9]STAGE3

004 PLATE PLATE PLATE

005 DELAY L,C,R [17]DELAY LCR

006 [18]DELAY L,R

007 [19]ECHO

008 [20]CROSS DELAY

009 ER1 ER2

010 GATE REVERB

011 REVERS GATE

012..015 NO EFFECT

016 WHITE ROOM

017 TUNNEL

018 CANYON

019 BASEMENT

020 KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3

021..063 NO EFFECT

064 THRU

065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS CHORUS

066 [13]CELESTE [12]CHORUS3 CELESTE3 [11]CHORUS2 CHORUS [10]CHORUS1 [22] [23]ROTARY

067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER FLANGER [14]FLANGER FLANGER

068 SYMPHONIC [15]SYMPHONIC

069 ROTARY SP. Rotary Sp

070 TREMOLO [21]TREMOLO Rotary Sp

071 AUTO PAN [16]AUTO PAN Rotary Sp Rotary Sp Tremolo Gtr Tremolo

072 [24]PHASER PHASER

073 DISTORTION COMP+DISTORTION

074 OVER DRIVE

075 AMP SIM. DIST.HARD DIST.SOFT

076 3BAND EQ EQ DISCO EQ TEL

077 2BAND EQ

078 AUTO WAH AUTO WAH+DIST AUTO WAH+ [25]WAH

OVERDRIVE

079 THRU

080 PITCH CHANGE PITCH CHANGE2

081 THRU

082 TOUCH WAH 1 TOUCH WAH+DIST TOUCH WAH+ TOUCH WAH 2

OVERDRIVE

083 COMPRESSOR

084 NOISE GATE

085 VOICE CANCEL

086 2WAY ROTARY SP

087

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

088 AMBIENCE

089..127 THRU

INSERTION EFFECT TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03..07 08 09..15 16 17 18 19 20 21..

000 THRU

001 HALL 1 HALL 2 HALL HALL HALL

002 ROOM 1 ROOM 2 ROOM 3 ROOM ROOM ROOM ROOM

003 STAGE 1 STAGE 2 STAGE STAGE

004 PLATE PLATE PLATE

005 DELAY L,C,R Delay LCR

006 DELAY L,R

007 ECHO

008 CROSS DELAY

009..019 THRU

020 KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3

021..064 THRU

065 CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 CHORUS 3 CHORUS 4

066 CELESTE 1 CELESTE 2 CELESTE 3 CELESTE 4 CHORUS CHORUS Rotary Sp

067 FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 FLANGER 3 FLANGER FLANGER

068 SYMPHONIC Symphonic

069

ROTARY SPEAKER 1

Rotary Sp

070 TREMOLO Tremolo Rotary Sp

071 AUTO PAN AutoPan Rotary Sp Rotary Sp Tremolo Gtr Tremolo

072 PHASER 1

073 DISTORTION

074 OVER DRIVE

075 AMP SIMULATOR DIST.HARD DIST.SOFT

076 3BAND EQ EQ DISCO EQ TEL

077 2-BAND EQ

078 AUTO WAH(LFO) Auto Wah

079..081 THRU

082 TOUCH WAH 1 TOUCH WAH 2

083 COMPRESSOR

084 NOISE GATE

085..086 THRU

087

ENSEMBLE DETUNE

088..127 THRU

MIDI Data Format

HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2

PLATE (reverb, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3–30.0s 0–69 table#4

2 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

3 Initial Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

12 Density 0–4 (reverb, variation block) 0–4

0–2 (insertion block) 0–2

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R – E=R – E<R63 1–127

14 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

15 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON, BASEMENT (reverb, variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Reverb Time 0.3–30.0s 0–69 table#4

2 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

3 Initial Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

4 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

6 Width 0.5–10.2m 0–37 table#11

7 Heigt 0.5–20.2m 0–73 table#11

8 Depth 0.5–30.2m 0–104 table#11

9 Wall Vary 0–30 0–30

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Rev Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

12 Density 0–4 0–4

13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R – E=R – E<R63 1–127

14 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

15 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

DELAY L,C,R (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

2 Rch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

3 Cch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

4 Feedback Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 Cch Level 0–127 0–127

7 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

DELAY L,R (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

2 Rch Delay 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1–1486.0ms (variation block) 1–14860

0.1–742.9ms (insertion block) 1–7429

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

ECHO (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Lch Delay1 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

2 Lch Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

3 Rch Delay1 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

4 Rch Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

5 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

6 Lch Delay2 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

7 Rch Delay2 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

8 Delay2 Level 0–127 0–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

< Table 1-10 > Effect Parameter List

CROSS DELAY (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 L->R Delay 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

2 R->L Delay 0.1–743.0ms (variation block) 1–7430

0.1–371.4ms (insertion block) 1–3714

3 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

4 Input Select L,R,L&R 0–2

5 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

13 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

14 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

16 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0–5

2 Room Size 0.1–7.0 0–44 table#6

3 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

4 Initial Delay 0–63 0–63 table#5

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Liveness 0–10 0–10

12 Density 0–3 0–3

13 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Type TypeA,TypeB 0–1

2 Room Size 0.1–20.0 0–127 table#6

3 Diffusion 0–10 0–10

4 Initial Delay 0–127 0–127 table#5

5 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Liveness 0–10 0–10

12 Density 0–3 0–3

13 High Damp 0.1–1.0 1–10

KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0–127 0–127 table#7

2 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

3 HPF Cutoff Thru–8.0kHz 0–52 table#3

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

4 Delay Offset 0–127 0–127 table#2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0–1

FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

4 Delay Offset 0–127 0–127 table#2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

14 LFO Phase Difference -180–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4–124

SYMPHONIC (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Delay Offset 0–127 0–127 table#2

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

ENSEMBLE DETUNE (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Detune -50–+50cent 14–114

2 Lch Init Delay 0–127 0–127 table#2

3 Rch Init Delay 0–127 0–127 table#2

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

(variation, insertion block)

12 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

(variation, insertion block)

13 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

(variation, insertion block)

14 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

(variation, insertion block)

AMBIENCE (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Delay Time 0–127 0–127 table#2

2 Output Phase normal/invers 0–1

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

ROTARY SPEAKER (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

2WAY ROTARY SPEAKER (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Rotor Speed 0.0Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 Drive Low 0–127 0–127

3 Drive High 0–127 0–127

4 Low/High L63>H – L=H – L<H63 1–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

11 Crossover Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

12 Mic L-R Angle 0deg–180deg(resolution=3deg.) 0–60

TREMOLO (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 AM Depth 0–127 0–127

3 PM Depth 0–127 0–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

14 LFO Phase Difference -180–+180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4–124

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0–1

AUTO PAN (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1 ●

2 L/R Depth 0–127 0–127

3 F/R Depth 0–127 0–127

4 PAN Direction L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R 0–5

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz (variation block) 14–54 table#3

12 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB (variation block) 52–76

13 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 (variation block) 10–120

PHASER 1 (chorus, variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0–127 0–127

4 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Stage 4,5,6 (chorus, insertion block) 4–6

4–12 (variation block) 4–12

12 Diffusion mono/stereo 0–1

PHASER 2 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0–127 0–127

4 Feedback Level -63–+63 1–127

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Stage 3,4,5,6 3-6

13 LFO Phase Difference

-180deg–+180deg(resolution=3deg.)

4–124

DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0–127 0–127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

3 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

5 Output Level 0–127 0–127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 10–120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp

COMP+DIST (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0–127 0–127 ●

2 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

3 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

5 Output Level 0–127 0–127

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

8 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 10–120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp

12 Attack 1ms–40ms 0–19 table#8

13 Release 10ms–680ms 0–15 table#9

14 Threshold -48dB–-6dB 79–121

15 Ratio 1.0–20.0 0–7 table#10

MIDI Data Format

AMP SIMULATOR (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Drive 0–127 0–127 ●

2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0–3

3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k–Thru 34–60 table#3

4 Output Level 0–127 0–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0–127 0–127 mild–sharp

3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz–10.0kHz 14–54 table#3

3 EQ Mid Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

4 EQ Mid Width 1.0–12.0 10–120

5 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz–2.0kHz 8–40 table#3

7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0–1

2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

2 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

4 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

AUTO WAH (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

AUTO WAH+DIST, AUTO WHA+ODRV (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz–39.7Hz 0–127 table#1

2 LFO Depth 0–127 0–127

3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

4 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

12 EQ Low Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz–thru 34–60 table#3

15 Output Level 0–127 0–127

TOUCH WAH 1 (variation, insertion block), TOUCH WAH+DIST (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Sensitive 0–127 0–127

2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

3 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

TOUCH WAH 2 (variation, insertion block), TOUCH WAH+ODRV (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Sensitive 0–127 0–127

2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0–127 0–127 ●

3 Resonance 1.0–12.0 10–120

6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz–2.0kHz 4–40 table#3

7 EQ Low Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz–16.0kHz 28–58 table#3

9 EQ High Gain -12–+12dB 52–76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127

11 Drive 0–127 0–127

12 EQ Low Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

13 EQ Mid Gain(distortion) -12–+12dB 52–76

14 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz–thru 34–60 table#3

15 Output Level 0–127 0–127

PITCH CHANGE 1 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Pitch -24–+24 40–88

2 Initial Delay 0–127 0–127 table#7

3 Fine 1 -50Hz–+50Hz 14–114

4 Fine 2 -50Hz–+50Hz 14–114

5 Feedback Level -99–+99% 1–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Pan 1 L63–R63 1–127

12 Output Level 1 0–127 0–127

13 Pan 2 L63–R63 1–127

14 Output Level 2 0–127 0–127

PITCH CHANGE 2 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Pitch -24–+24 40–88

2 Initial Delay 0–127 0–127 table#7

3 Fine 1 -50–+50cent 14–114

4 Fine 2 -50–+50cent 14–114

5 Feedback Level -99–+99% 1–127

10 Dry/Wet D63>W – D=W – D<W63 1–127 ●

11 Pan 1 L63–R63 1–127

12 Output Level 1 0–127 0–127

13 Pan 2 L63–R63 1–127

14 Output Level 2 0–127 0–127

COMPRESSOR (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Attack 1–40ms 0–19 table#8

2 Release 10–680ms 0–15 table#9

3 Threshold -48–-6dB 79–121

4 Ratio 1.0–20.0 0–7 table#10

5 Output Level 0–127 0–127

NOISE GATE (variation, insertion block)

No. Parameter Value See Table Control

1 Attack 1–40ms 0–19 table#8

2 Release 10–680ms 0–15 table#9

3 Threshold -72–-30dB 55–97

4 Output Level 0–127 0–127

e#7

LFO

uenc

ever

(400

ever

Wid

;

igh

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.00 32 1.35 64 2.69 96 8.41 0 0.3 32 3.5 64 17.0 0 0.1 32 100.9 64 201.6 96 302.4 0 0.5 32 8.8 64 17.6 96 27.5

1 0.04 33 1.39 65 2.78 97 8.75 1 0.4 33 3.6 65 18.0 1 3.2 33 104.0 65 204.8 97 305.5 1 0.8 33 9.1 65 17.9 98 28.1

2 0.08 34 1.43 66 2.86 98 9.08 2 0.5 34 3.7 66 19.0 2 6.4 34 107.2 66 207.9 98 308.7 2 1.0 34 9.4 66 18.2 99 28.5

3 0.13 35 1.47 67 2.94 99 9.42 3 0.6 35 3.8 67 20.0 3 9.5 35 110.3 67 211.1 99 311.8 3 1.3 35 9.6 67 18.5 100 28.8

4 0.17 36 1.51 68 3.03 100 9.76 4 0.7 36 3.9 68 25.0 4 12.7 36 113.5 68 214.2 100 315.0 4 1.5 36 9.9 68 18.8 101 29.2

5 0.21 37 1.56 69 3.11 101 10.1 5 0.8 37 4.0 69 30.0 5 15.8 37 116.6 69 217.4 101 318.1 5 1.8 37 10.2 69 19.1 102 29.5

6 0.25 38 1.60 70 3.20 102 10.8 6 0.9 38 4.1 6 19.0 38 119.8 70 220.5 102 321.3 6 2.0 38 10.4 70 19.4 103 29.9

7 0.29 39 1.64 71 3.28 103 11.4 7 1.0 39 4.2 7 22.1 39 122.9 71 223.7 103 324.4 7 2.3 39 10.7 71 19.7 104 30.2

8 0.34 40 1.68 72 3.37 104 12.1 8 1.1 40 4.3 8 25.3 40 126.1 72 226.8 104 327.6 8 2.6 40 11.0 72 20.0

9 0.38 41 1.72 73 3.45 105 12.8 9 1.2 41 4.4 9 28.4 41 129.2 73 230.0 105 330.7 9 2.8 41 11.2 73 20.2

10 0.42 42 1.77 74 3.53 106 13.5 10 1.3 42 4.5 10 31.6 42 132.4 74 233.1 106 333.9 10 3.1 42 11.5 74 20.5

11 0.46 43 1.81 75 3.62 107 14.1 11 1.4 43 4.6 11 34.7 43 135.5 75 236.3 107 337.0 11 3.3 43 11.8 75 20.8

12 0.51 44 1.85 76 3.70 108 14.8 12 1.5 44 4.7 12 37.9 44 138.6 76 239.4 108 340.2 12 3.6 44 12.1 76 21.1

13 0.55 45 1.89 77 3.87 109 15.5 13 1.6 45 4.8 13 41.0 45 141.8 77 242.6 109 343.3 13 3.9 45 12.3 77 21.4

14 0.59 46 1.94 78 4.04 110 16.2 14 1.7 46 4.9 14 44.2 46 144.9 78 245.7 110 346.5 14 4.1 46 12.6 78 21.7

15 0.63 47 1.98 79 4.21 111 16.8 15 1.8 47 5.0 15 47.3 47 148.1 79 248.9 111 349.6 15 4.4 47 12.9 79 22.0

16 0.67 48 2.02 80 4.37 112 17.5 16 1.9 48 5.5 16 50.5 48 151.2 80 252.0 112 352.8 16 4.6 48 13.1 80 22.4

17 0.72 49 2.06 81 4.54 113 18.2 17 2.0 49 6.0 17 53.6 49 154.4 81 255.2 113 355.9 17 4.9 49 13.4 81 22.7

18 0.76 50 2.10 82 4.71 114 19.5 18 2.1 50 6.5 18 56.8 50 157.5 82 258.3 114 359.1 18 5.2 50 13.7 82 23.0

19 0.80 51 2.15 83 4.88 115 20.9 19 2.2 51 7.0 19 59.9 51 160.7 83 261.5 115 362.2 19 5.4 51 14.0 83 23.3

20 0.84 52 2.19 84 5.05 116 22.2 20 2.3 52 7.5 20 63.1 52 163.8 84 264.6 116 365.4 20 5.7 52 14.2 84 23.6

21 0.88 53 2.23 85 5.22 117 23.6 21 2.4 53 8.0 21 66.2 53 167.0 85 267.7 117 368.5 21 5.9 53 14.5 85 23.9

22 0.93 54 2.27 86 5.38 118 24.9 22 2.5 54 8.5 22 69.4 54 170.1 86 270.9 118 371.7 22 6.2 54 14.8 86 24.2

23 0.97 55 2.31 87 5.55 119 26.2 23 2.6 55 9.0 23 72.5 55 173.3 87 274.0 119 374.8 23 6.5 55 15.1 87 24.5

24 1.01 56 2.36 88 5.72 120 27.6 24 2.7 56 9.5 24 75.7 56 176.4 88 277.2 120 378.0 24 6.7 56 15.4 88 24.9

25 1.05 57 2.40 89 6.06 121 28.9 25 2.8 57 10.0 25 78.8 57 179.6 89 280.3 121 381.1 25 7.0 57 15.6 89 25.2

26 1.09 58 2.44 90 6.39 122 30.3 26 2.9 58 11.0 26 82.0 58 182.7 90 283.5 122 384.3 26 7.2 58 15.9 90 25.5

27 1.14 59 2.48 91 6.73 123 31.6 27 3.0 59 12.0 27 85.1 59 185.9 91 286.6 123 387.4 27 7.5 59 16.2 91 25.8

28 1.18 60 2.52 92 7.07 124 33.0 28 3.1 60 13.0 28 88.3 60 189.0 92 289.8 124 390.6 28 7.8 60 16.5 92 26.1

29 1.22 61 2.57 93 7.40 125 34.3 29 3.2 61 14.0 29 91.4 61 192.2 93 292.9 125 393.7 29 8.0 61 16.8 93 26.5

30 1.26 62 2.61 94 7.74 126 37.0 30 3.3 62 15.0 30 94.6 62 195.3 94 296.1 126 396.9 30 8.3 62 17.1 94 26.8

31 1.30 63 2.65 95 8.08 127 39.7 31 3.4 63 16.0 31 97.7 63 198.5 95 299.2 127 400.0 31 8.6 63 17.3 95 27.1

e#5

Off

set

(200

ressor

ttac

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

0 0.0 32 3.2 64 6.4 96 9.6 0 0.1 32 50.5 64 100.8 96 151.2 0 1

1 0.1 33 3.3 65 6.5 97 9.7 1 1.7 33 52.0 65 102.4 97 152.8 1 2

2 0.2 34 3.4 66 6.6 98 9.8 2 3.2 34 53.6 66 104.0 98 154.4 2 3

3 0.3 35 3.5 67 6.7 99 9.9 3 4.8 35 55.2 67 105.6 99 155.9 3 4

4 0.4 36 3.6 68 6.8 100 10.0 4 6.4 36 56.8 68 107.1 100 157.5 4 5

5 0.5 37 3.7 69 6.9 101 11.1 5 8.0 37 58.3 69 108.7 101 159.1 5 6

6 0.6 38 3.8 70 7.0 102 12.2 6 9.5 38 59.9 70 110.3 102 160.6 6 7

7 0.7 39 3.9 71 7.1 103 13.3 7 11.1 39 61.5 71 111.9 103 162.2 7 8

8 0.8 40 4.0 72 7.2 104 14.4 8 12.7 40 63.1 72 113.4 104 163.8 8 9

9 0.9 41 4.1 73 7.3 105 15.5 9 14.3 41 64.6 73 115.0 105 165.4 9 10

10 1.0 42 4.2 74 7.4 106 17.1 10 15.8 42 66.2 74 116.6 106 166.9 10 12

11 1.1 43 4.3 75 7.5 107 18.6 11 17.4 43 67.8 75 118.2 107 168.5 11 14

12 1.2 44 4.4 76 7.6 108 20.2 12 19.0 44 69.4 76 119.7 108 170.1 12 16

13 1.3 45 4.5 77 7.7 109 21.8 13 20.6 45 70.9 77 121.3 109 171.7 13 18

14 1.4 46 4.6 78 7.8 110 23.3 14 22.1 46 72.5 78 122.9 110 173.2 14 20

15 1.5 47 4.7 79 7.9 111 24.9 15 23.7 47 74.1 79 124.4 111 174.8 15 23

16 1.6 48 4.8 80 8.0 112 26.5 16 25.3 48 75.7 80 126.0 112 176.4 16 26

17 1.7 49 4.9 81 8.1 113 28.0 17 26.9 49 77.2 81 127.6 113 178.0 17 30

18 1.8 50 5.0 82 8.2 114 29.6 18 28.4 50 78.8 82 129.2 114 179.5 18 35

19 1.9 51 5.1 83 8.3 115 31.2 19 30.0 51 80.4 83 130.7 115 181.1 19 40

20 2.0 52 5.2 84 8.4 116 32.8 20 31.6 52 81.9 84 132.3 116 182.7

21 2.1 53 5.3 85 8.5 117 34.3 21 33.2 53 83.5 85 133.9 117 184.3

22 2.2 54 5.4 86 8.6 118 35.9 22 34.7 54 85.1 86 135.5 118 185.8

23 2.3 55 5.5 87 8.7 119 37.5 23 36.3 55 86.7 87 137.0 119 187.4

24 2.4 56 5.6 88 8.8 120 39.0 24 37.9 56 88.2 88 138.6 120 189.0

25 2.5 57 5.7 89 8.9 121 40.6 25 39.5 57 89.8 89 140.2 121 190.6

26 2.6 58 5.8 90 9.0 122 42.2 26 41.0 58 91.4 90 141.8 122 192.1

27 2.7 59 5.9 91 9.1 123 43.7 27 42.6 59 93.0 91 143.3 123 193.7

28 2.8 60 6.0 92 9.2 124 45.3 28 44.2 60 94.5 92 144.9 124 195.3

29 2.9 61 6.1 93 9.3 125 46.9 29 45.7 61 96.1 93 146.5 125 196.9

30 3.0 62 6.2 94 9.4 126 48.4 30 47.3 62 97.7 94 148.1 126 198.4

31 3.1 63 6.3 95 9.5 127 50.0 31 48.9 63 99.3 95 149.6 127 200.0

uenc

oom

ressor

ease

Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value

8 50 40 2.0k 0 0.1 32 5.1 0 10

9 56 41 2.2k 1 0.3 33 5.3 1 15

10 63 42 2.5k 2 0.4 34 5.4 2 25

11 70 43 2.8k 3 0.6 35 5.6 3 35

12 80 44 3.2k 4 0.7 36 5.7 4 45

13 90 45 3.6k 5 0.9 37 5.9 5 55

14 100 46 4.0k 6 1.0 38 6.1 6 65

15 110 47 4.5k 7 1.2 39 6.2 7 75

16 125 48 5.0k 8 1.4 40 6.4 8 85

17 140 49 5.6k 9 1.5 41 6.5 9 100

18 160 50 6.3k 10 1.7 42 6.7 10 115

19 180 51 7.0k 11 1.8 43 6.8 11 140

20 200 52 8.0k 12 2.0 44 7.0 12 170

21 225 53 9.0k 13 2.1 13 230

22 250 54 10.0k 14 2.3 14 340

23 280 55 11.0k 15 2.5 15 680

24 315 56 12.0k 16 2.6

25 355 57 14.0k 17 2.8

26 400 58 16.0k 18 2.9

27 450 59 18.0k 19 3.1

28 500 60 THRU(20.0k) 20 3.2

29 560 21 3.4

30 630 22 3.5

ressor

31 700 23 3.7 Data Value

32 800 24 3.9 0 1.0

33 900 25 4.0 1 1.5

34 1.0k 26 4.2 2 2.0

35 1.1k 27 4.3 3 3.0

36 1.2k 28 4.5 4 5.0

37 1.4k 29 4.6 5 7.0

38 1.6k 30 4.8 6 10.0

39 1.8k 31 5.0 7 20.0

< Table 1-11 > Effect Data Value Assign Table

MIDI Data Format

YAMAHA [Clavinova] Date: 2/18, 1997

Model: CVP-98/96 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default 1 1~16

Channel Changed 1~16 1~16

Default 3 1 *1 Poly Mode only

Mode Messages XX

Altered ***************** X

Note 21~108 0~127

Number : True voice ***************** 21~108

Velocity Note ON O 9nH, v=1~127 O 9nH, v=1~127

Note OFF XX

After Key’s XO

Touch Ch’s XO

Pitch Bender XO 0~24 semi

0, 32 OOBank Select

1, 5, 7, 10, 11 X*2 O

6, 38 OOData Entry

64~67 OO

71~74 X*2 OSound Controller

Control 84 X*2 OPortamento Controller

Change 91, 93, 94 O(#93 X *2) OEffect Depth

96~97 XORPN Inc, Dec

98~99 X*2 ONRPN LSB, MSB

100~101 OORPN LSB, MSB

120 XOAll Sounds off

121 XOReset All Controllers

Program O 0~127 O0~127

Change : True # *****************

System Exclusive OO

System : Song Position XX

: Song Select XO

Common : Tune XX

System : Clock OO

Real Time : Commands OO

Aux : Local ON/OFF XX

: All Notes OFF OO (123~127)

Messages : Active Sense OO

: Reset XX

Notes : *1 ; Recieve Mode is always multi timbre and Poly mode.

*2 ; Transmitted when “ACMP&RHY” or “HARMONY” MIDI send SW is ON.

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO O: Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO X: No

Voice List

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Piano Grand Piano 0 112 0

Bright Piano 0 112 1

Mellow Piano 0 114 0

Rock Piano 0 113 1

Mono Piano 0 113 0

Piano EP 0 115 2

Honky Tonk 0 112 3

Harpsichord1 0 112 6

Harpsichord2 0 113 6

Grand Harpsi 0 115 6

E.Piano Elec. Piano 0 113 4

DX EP 0 112 5

CP80 0 116 2

Jazz EP 1 0 116 4

DX EP Modern 0 115 5

Stage EP 0 117 4

Galaxy EP 0 113 5

Funky EP 0 114 4

Hyper EP 0 115 4

Dream EP 0 114 5

Jazz EP 2 0 112 4

Wire EP 0 113 5

Tremolo EP 0 118 4

Clavi. 0 112 7

Vibes Vibes 0 112 11

Jazz Vibes 0 113 11

Celesta 0 112 8

Marimba 0 112 12

Glockenspiel 0 112 9

Xylophone 0 112 13

TubularBells 0 112 14

Music Box 0 112 10

Steel Drums 0 112 114

Guitar Gut Guitar 0 112 24

Folk Guitar 0 112 25

Jazz Guitar1 0 112 26

Banjo 0 112 105

Harp 0 112 46

Nylon Guitar 0 113 24

Steel Guitar 0 113 25

Jazz Guitar2 0 113 26

Clean Guitar 0 112 27

Dist. Guitar 0 112 30

12Str.Guitar 0 115 25

Mute Guitar 0 112 28

HawaiianGtr. 0 114 26

OctaveGuitar 0 115 26

Clavi. Tone / Clavinova T. 0 112 88

Synth NewAge Pad1 0 113 88

NewAge Pad2 0 115 88

Square Lead 0 112 80

Saw. Lead 0 112 81

Synth Pf 0 114 88

Clavi. Tone / Strings Pad 0 112 51

Synth Atmosphere 0 112 99

Brass Bells 0 112 93

SynthCrystal 0 112 96

Synth Bell 0 116 88

Brass Pad 0 112 90

Choir Pad 0 112 91

Cosmic Pad 0 112 101

Quack Lead 0 112 87

Organ Pipe Organ 0 112 19

Class. Organ 0 113 19

Chapel Organ 0 115 19

Jazz Organ 0 112 16

Accordion 0 115 21

Perc. Organ 0 112 17

Trem. Organ 0 112 18

Rock Organ 0 113 18

Theatre Org. 0 114 16

Organ Combi. 0 116 16

Elec. Organ 0 113 16

French Accrd 0 112 21

Tango Accrd. 0 112 23

Strings / Choir Orch.Strings 0 115 48

Strings 0 112 48

Violin 0 112 40

Pizzicato 0 112 45

Choir 0 115 52

Class. Strs. 0 114 48

PopularStrs. 0 116 48

StringsSlow1 0 112 49

StringsSlow2 0 112 49

Choir Oohs 0 112 53

ChamberStrs. 0 113 48

Cello 0 112 42

Syn. Strings 0 112 50

Synth Choir 0 112 52

OrchestraHit 0 112 55

Brass BigBnd Brass 0 115 61

Small Brass 0 113 61

Trumpet 0 112 56

Trombone 0 112 57

French Horn 0 112 60

BrassSection 0 112 61

Octave Brass 0 114 61

MuteTrumpet1 0 113 59

MuteTrumpet2 0 112 59

Tuba 0 112 58

Synth Brass1 0 112 62

Synth Brass2 0 112 63

Soft Trumpet 0 112 56

Flugel Horn 0 113 56

Brass&Sax 0 116 61

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Sax / Flute Tenor Sax 0 112 66

Alto Sax 0 112 65

Flute 0 112 73

Oboe 0 112 68

Clarinet 0 112 71

Soprano Sax 0 112 64

Baritone Sax 0 112 67

Pan Flute 0 112 75

Bassoon 0 112 70

Harmonica 0 112 22

Piccolo 0 112 72

Recorder 0 112 74

Sax&Clarinet 0 113 65

Sax Section 0 114 65

WindEnsemble 0 113 73

Bass Acous.Bass 1 0 112 32

Acous.Bass 2 0 113 32

E. Bass Slap 0 112 33

Finger Bass 0 114 33

Timpani 0 112 47

Elec. Bass 0 113 33

FretlessBass 0 112 35

Slap Bass 0 112 36

Synth Bass 1 0 112 38

Synth Bass 2 0 112 39

Pick Bass 0 112 34

Organ Bass 0 117 16

Bass&Cymbal 0 114 32

Drums Standard Kit 127 0 0

Standard2Kit 127 0 1

Room Kit 127 0 8

Rock Kit 127 0 16

Electro Kit 127 0 24

Analog Kit 127 0 25

Dance Kit 127 0 27

Jazz Kit 127 0 32

Brush Kit 127 0 40

Classic Kit 127 0 48

SFX1 Kit 126 0 0

SFX2 Kit 126 0 1

XG GrandPno 0 0 0

GrndPnoK 0 1 0

MelloGrP 0 18 0

PianoStr 0 40 0

Dream 0 41 0

BritePno 0 0 1

BritPnoK 0 1 1

El.Grand 0 0 2

ElGrPnoK 0 1 2

Det.CP80 0 32 2

LayerCP1 0 40 2

LayerCP2 0 41 2

HnkyTonk 0 0 3

XG HnkyTnkK 0 1 3

E.Piano1 0 0 4

El.Pno1K 0 1 4

MelloEP1 0 18 4

Chor.EP1 0 32 4

HardEl.P 0 40 4

VX El.P1 0 45 4

60sEl.P1 0 64 4

E.Piano2 0 0 5

El.Pno2K 0 1 5

Chor.EP2 0 32 5

DX Hard 0 33 5

DXLegend 0 34 5

DX Phase 0 40 5

DX+Analg 0 41 5

DXKotoEP 0 42 5

VX El.P2 0 45 5

Harpsi. 0 0 6

Harpsi.K 0 1 6

Harpsi.2 0 25 6

Harpsi.3 0 35 6

Clavi 0 0 7

Clavi K 0 1 7

ClaviWah 0 27 7

PulseClv 0 64 7

PierceCl 0 65 7

Celesta 0 0 8

Glocken 0 0 9

MusicBox 0 0 10

Orgel 0 64 10

Vibes 0 0 11

Vibes K 0 1 11

HardVibe 0 45 11

Marimba 0 0 12

MarimbaK 0 1 12

SineMrmb 0 64 12

Balimba 0 97 12

Log Drum 0 98 12

Xylophon 0 0 13

TubulBel 0 0 14

ChrchBel 0 96 14

Carillon 0 97 14

Dulcimer 0 0 15

Dulcimr2 0 35 15

Cimbalom 0 96 15

Santur 0 97 15

DrawOrgn 0 0 16

DetDrwOr 0 32 16

60sDrOr1 0 33 16

60sDrOr2 0 34 16

70sDrOr1 0 35 16

DrawOrg2 0 36 16

60sDrOr3 0 37 16

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice List

XG EvenBar 0 38 16

16+2’2/3 0 40 16

Organ Ba 0 64 16

70sDrOr2 0 65 16

CheezOrg 0 66 16

DrawOrg3 0 67 16

PercOrgn 0 0 17

70sPcOr1 0 24 17

DetPrcOr 0 32 17

Lite Org 0 33 17

PercOrg2 0 37 17

RockOrgn 0 0 18

RotaryOr 0 64 18

SloRotar 0 65 18

FstRotar 0 66 18

ChrchOrg 0 0 19

ChurOrg3 0 32 19

ChurOrg2 0 35 19

NotreDam 0 40 19

OrgFlute 0 64 19

TrmOrgFl 0 65 19

ReedOrgn 0 0 20

Puff Org 0 40 20

Acordion 0 0 21

AccordIt 0 32 21

Harmnica 0 0 22

Harmo. 2 0 32 22

TangoAcd 0 0 23

TngoAcd2 0 64 23

NylonGtr 0 0 24

NylonGt2 0 16 24

NylonGt3 0 25 24

VelGtHrm 0 43 24

Ukulele 0 96 24

SteelGtr 0 0 25

SteelGt2 0 16 25

12StrGtr 0 35 25

Nyln&Stl 0 40 25

Stl&Body 0 41 25

Mandolin 0 96 25

Jazz Gtr 0 0 26

MelloGtr 0 18 26

Jazz Amp 0 32 26

CleanGtr 0 0 27

ChorusGt 0 32 27

Mute Gtr 0 0 28

FunkGtr1 0 40 28

MuteStlG 0 41 28

FunkGtr2 0 43 28

Jazz Man 0 45 28

Ovrdrive 0 0 29

Gt.Pinch 0 43 29

Dist.Gtr 0 0 30

XG FeedbkGt 0 40 30

FeedbGt2 0 41 30

GtrHarmo 0 0 31

GtFeedbk 0 65 31

GtrHrmo2 0 66 31

Aco.Bass 0 0 32

JazzRthm 0 40 32

VXUprght 0 45 32

FngrBass 0 0 33

FingrDrk 0 18 33

FlangeBa 0 27 33

Ba&DstEG 0 40 33

FngrSlap 0 43 33

FngBass2 0 45 33

Mod.Bass 0 65 33

PickBass 0 0 34

MutePkBa 0 28 34

Fretless 0 0 35

Fretles2 0 32 35

Fretles3 0 33 35

Fretles4 0 34 35

SynFretl 0 96 35

SmthFrt1 0 97 35

SlapBas1 0 0 36

ResoSlap 0 27 36

PunchThm 0 32 36

SlapBas2 0 0 37

VeloSlap 0 43 37

SynBass1 0 0 38

SynBa1Dk 0 18 38

FastResB 0 20 38

AcidBass 0 24 38

Clv Bass 0 35 38

TechnoBa 0 40 38

Orbiter 0 64 38

Sqr.Bass 0 65 38

RubberBa 0 66 38

Hammer 0 96 38

SynBass2 0 0 39

MelloSBa 0 6 39

Seq Bass 0 12 39

ClkSynBa 0 18 39

SynBa2Dk 0 19 39

SmthSynB 0 32 39

ModulrBa 0 40 39

DX Bass 0 41 39

X WireBa 0 64 39

Violin 0 0 40

Slow Vln 0 8 40

Viola 0 0 41

Cello 0 0 42

Contrabs 0 0 43

Trem.Str 0 0 44

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice List

XG SlwTrStr 0 8 44

Susp. Str 0 40 44

Pizz.Str 0 0 45

Harp 0 0 46

YangChin 0 40 46

Timpani 0 0 47

Strings1 0 0 48

S.Strngs 0 3 48

Slow Str 0 8 48

Arco Str 0 24 48

60sStrng 0 35 48

Orchestr 0 40 48

Orchstr2 0 41 48

TremOrch 0 42 48

Velo.Str 0 45 48

Strings2 0 0 49

S.SlwStr 0 3 49

LegatoSt 0 8 49

Warm Str 0 40 49

Kingdom 0 41 49

70s Str 0 64 49

Strings3 0 65 49

Syn Str1 0 0 50

Reso Str 0 27 50

Syn Str4 0 64 50

Syn Str5 0 65 50

Syn Str2 0 0 51

ChoirAah 0 0 52

S.Choir 0 3 52

Ch.Aahs2 0 16 52

MelChoir 0 32 52

ChoirStr 0 40 52

VoiceOoh 0 0 53

SynVoice 0 0 54

SyVoice2 0 40 54

Choral 0 41 54

AnaVoice 0 64 54

Orch.Hit 0 0 55

OrchHit2 0 35 55

Impact 0 64 55

Trumpet 0 0 56

Trumpet2 0 16 56

BriteTrp 0 17 56

Warm Trp 0 32 56

Trombone 0 0 57

Trmbone2 0 18 57

Tuba 0 0 58

Tuba 2 0 16 58

Mute Trp 0 0 59

Fr.Horn 0 0 60

FrHrSolo 0 6 60

FrHorn 2 0 32 60

HornOrch 0 37 60

XG BrssSect 0 0 61

Tp&TbSec 0 35 61

BrssSec2 0 40 61

HiBrass 0 41 61

MelloBrs 0 42 61

SynBrss1 0 0 62

Quack Br 0 12 62

RezSynBr 0 20 62

PolyBrss 0 24 62

SynBrss3 0 27 62

JumpBrss 0 32 62

AnVelBr1 0 45 62

AnVelBr2 0 64 62

SynBrss2 0 0 63

Soft Brs 0 18 63

SynBrss4 0 40 63

ChoirBrs 0 41 63

VelBrss2 0 45 63

AnaBrss2 0 64 63

SprnoSax 0 0 64

Alto Sax 0 0 65

Sax Sect 0 40 65

HyprAlto 0 43 65

TenorSax 0 0 66

BrthTnSx 0 40 66

SoftTenr 0 41 66

TnrSax 2 0 64 66

Bari.Sax 0 0 67

Oboe 0 0 68

Eng.Horn 0 0 69

Bassoon 0 0 70

Clarinet 0 0 71

Piccolo 0 0 72

Flute 0 0 73

Recorder 0 0 74

PanFlute 0 0 75

Bottle 0 0 76

Shakhchi 0 0 77

Whistle 0 0 78

Ocarina 0 0 79

SquareLd 0 0 80

SquarLd2 0 6 80

LMSquare 0 8 80

Hollow 0 18 80

Shroud 0 19 80

Mellow 0 64 80

SoloSine 0 65 80

SineLead 0 66 80

Saw Lead 0 0 81

Saw Ld 2 0 6 81

ThickSaw 0 8 81

Dyna Saw 0 18 81

Digi Saw 0 19 81

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice List

XG Big Lead 0 20 81

HeavySyn 0 24 81

WaspySyn 0 25 81

PulseSaw 0 40 81

Dr. Lead 0 41 81

VeloLead 0 45 81

Seq Ana. 0 96 81

CaliopLd 0 0 82

PureLead 0 65 82

Chiff Ld 0 0 83

Rubby 0 64 83

CharanLd 0 0 84

DistLead 0 64 84

WireLead 0 65 84

Voice Ld 0 0 85

SynthAah 0 24 85

Vox Lead 0 64 85

Fifth Ld 0 0 86

Big Five 0 35 86

Bass&Ld 0 0 87

Big&Low 0 16 87

Fat&Prky 0 64 87

Soft Wrl 0 65 87

NewAgePd 0 0 88

Fantasy 0 64 88

Warm Pad 0 0 89

ThickPad 0 16 89

Soft Pad 0 17 89

Sine Pad 0 18 89

Horn Pad 0 64 89

RotarStr 0 65 89

PolySyPd 0 0 90

PolyPd80 0 64 90

ClickPad 0 65 90

Ana. Pad 0 66 90

SquarPad 0 67 90

ChoirPad 0 0 91

Heaven 0 64 91

Itopia 0 66 91

CC Pad 0 67 91

BowedPad 0 0 92

Glacier 0 64 92

GlassPad 0 65 92

MetalPad 0 0 93

Tine Pad 0 64 93

Pan Pad 0 65 93

Halo Pad 0 0 94

SweepPad 0 0 95

Shwimmer 0 20 95

Converge 0 27 95

PolarPad 0 64 95

Celstial 0 66 95

Rain 0 0 96

XG ClaviPad 0 45 96

HrmoRain 0 64 96

AfrcnWnd 0 65 96

Carib 0 66 96

SoundTrk 0 0 97

Prologue 0 27 97

Ancestrl 0 64 97

Crystal 0 0 98

SynDrCmp 0 12 98

Popcorn 0 14 98

TinyBell 0 18 98

RndGlock 0 35 98

GlockChi 0 40 98

ClearBel 0 41 98

ChorBell 0 42 98

SynMalet 0 64 98

SftCryst 0 65 98

LoudGlok 0 66 98

ChrstBel 0 67 98

VibeBell 0 68 98

DigiBell 0 69 98

AirBells 0 70 98

BellHarp 0 71 98

Gamelmba 0 72 98

Atmosphr 0 0 99

WarmAtms 0 18 99

HollwRls 0 19 99

Nylon EP 0 40 99

NylnHarp 0 64 99

Harp Vox 0 65 99

AtmosPad 0 66 99

Planet 0 67 99

Bright 0 0 100

FantaBel 0 64 100

Smokey 0 96 100

Goblins 0 0 101

GobSynth 0 64 101

Creeper 0 65 101

Ring Pad 0 66 101

Ritual 0 67 101

ToHeaven 0 68 101

Night 0 70 101

Glisten 0 71 101

BelChoir 0 96 101

Echoes 0 0 102

Echoes 2 0 8 102

Echo Pan 0 14 102

EchoBell 0 64 102

Big Pan 0 65 102

SynPiano 0 66 102

Creation 0 67 102

StarDust 0 68 102

Reso&Pan 0 69 102

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice List

XG Sci-Fi 0 0 103

Starz 0 64 103

Sitar 0 0 104

DetSitar 0 32 104

Sitar 2 0 35 104

Tambra 0 96 104

Tamboura 0 97 104

Banjo 0 0 105

MuteBnjo 0 28 105

Rabab 0 96 105

Gopichnt 0 97 105

Oud 0 98 105

Shamisen 0 0 106

Koto 0 0 107

Taisho-k 0 96 107

Kanoon 0 97 107

Kalimba 0 0 108

Bagpipe 0 0 109

Fiddle 0 0 110

Shanai 0 0 111

Shanai 2 0 64 111

Pungi 0 96 111

Hichriki 0 97 111

TnklBell 0 0 112

Bonang 0 96 112

Altair 0 97 112

Gamelan 0 98 112

S.Gamlan 0 99 112

Rama Cym 0 100 112

AsianBel 0 101 112

Agogo 0 0 113

SteelDrm 0 0 114

GlasPerc 0 97 114

ThaiBell 0 98 114

WoodBlok 0 0 115

Castanet 0 96 115

TaikoDrm 0 0 116

Gr.Cassa 0 96 116

MelodTom 0 0 117

Mel Tom2 0 64 117

Real Tom 0 65 117

Rock Tom 0 66 117

Syn Drum 0 0 118

Ana Tom 0 64 118

ElecPerc 0 65 118

RevCymbl 0 0 119

FretNoiz 0 0 120

BrthNoiz 0 0 121

Seashore 0 0 122

Tweet 0 0 123

Telphone 0 0 124

Helicptr 0 0 125

Applause 0 0 126

XG Gunshot 0 0 127

CuttngNz 64 0 0

CttngNz2 64 0 1

Str Slap 64 0 3

Fl.KClik 64 0 16

Shower 64 0 32

Thunder 64 0 33

Wind 64 0 34

Stream 64 0 35

Bubble 64 0 36

Feed 64 0 37

Dog 64 0 48

Horse 64 0 49

Tweet 2 64 0 50

Ghost 64 0 54

Maou 64 0 55

Tel.Dial 64 0 64

DoorSqek 64 0 65

DoorSlam 64 0 66

ScratchC 64 0 67

ScratchS 64 0 68

WindChim 64 0 69

Telphon2 64 0 70

CarEIgnt 64 0 80

CarTSqel 64 0 81

Car Pass 64 0 82

CarCrash 64 0 83

Siren 64 0 84

Train 64 0 85

JetPlane 64 0 86

Starship 64 0 87

Burst 64 0 88

Coaster 64 0 89

Submarin 64 0 90

Laugh 64 0 96

Scream 64 0 97

Punch 64 0 98

Heart 64 0 99

Footstep 64 0 100

MchinGun 64 0 112

LaserGun 64 0 113

Xplosion 64 0 114

Firework 64 0 115

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice #

Category Voice Name MSB # LSB # Program

Change #

Voice List

Drum/key Assignment List

Bank Select MSB 127 127 127 127 127 127

Bank Select LSB 0 0 0 0 0 0

Program # (1-128) 1 2 9 17 25 26

Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Standard Kit Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note Note # Note off assign

C#113C#-1 3 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

D 1 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

D#115D#-1 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

E 1 16 E -1 Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

F 1 17 F -1 4 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

F#118F#-1 4 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

G 1 19 G -1 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

G#120G#-1 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

A 1 21 A -1 Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click

A#122A#-1 Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell

B 1 23 B -1 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

C 2 24 C 0 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

C#225C#0 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

D2 26 D0

Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl

D#227D#0 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

E2 28 E0

BrushTapSwrl BrushTapSwrl BrushTapSwrl BrushTapSwrl ReversCymbal ReversCymbal

F2 29 F0

Snare Roll Snare Roll 2 Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll

F#230F#0 Castanet Castanet Castanet Castanet Hi Q 2 Hi Q 2

G 2 31 G 0 Snare Soft Snare Soft 2 Snare Soft Snare Noisy SnrSnpyElctr SnareNoisy 4

G#232G#0 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

A 2 33 A 0 Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Tight 2 Kick 3 Kick Tight 2

A#234A#0 OpenRimShot RimShotHShrt OpenRimShot OpenRimShot OpenRimShot OpenRimShot

B 2 35 B 0 Kick Tight KickTghtShrt Kick Tight Kick 2 Kick Gate KickAnlgShrt

C 3 36 C 1 Kick Kick Short Kick Kick Gate KckGateHeavy Kick Analog

C#337C#1 Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick SideStickAn

D 3 38 D 1 Snare Snare Short Snare Snappy Snare Rock SnareNoisy 2 SnareAnalog

D#339D#1 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap

E 3 40 E 1 Snare Tight SnareTight H SnrTightSnpy SnareRockRim SnareNoisy 3 SnareAnalog2

F 3 41 F 1 Floor Tom L Floor Tom L Tom Room 1 Tom Rock 1 TomElectro 1 Tom Analog 1

F#342F#1 1 Hi-HatClosed Hi-HatClosed Hi-HatClosed Hi-HatClosed Hi-HatClosed HatCloseAnlg

G 3 43 G 1 Floor Tom H Floor Tom H Tom Room 2 Tom Rock 2 TomElectro 2 Tom Analog 2

G#344G#1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal HatCloseAn 2

A 3 45 A 1 Low Tom Low Tom Tom Room 3 Tom Rock 3 TomElectro 3 Tom Analog 3

A#346A#1 1 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open HatOpen Anlg

B 3 47 B 1 Mid Tom L Mid Tom L Tom Room 4 Tom Rock 4 TomElectro 4 Tom Analog 4

C 4 48 C 2 Mid Tom H Mid Tom H Tom Room 5 Tom Rock 5 TomElectro 5 Tom Analog 5

C#449C#2 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 Crash Analog

D 4 50 D 2 High Tom High Tom Tom Room 6 Tom Rock 6 TomElectro 6 Tom Analog 6

D#451D#2 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1

E 4 52 E 2 Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Chinese Cym

F 4 53 F 2 Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup

F#454F#2 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine

G 4 55 G 2 SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal

G#456G#2 Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Anlg

A 4 57 A 2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2

A#458A#2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap

B 4 59 B 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2

C 5 60 C 3 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H

C#561C#3 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L

D 5 62 D 3 Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga Anlg H

D#563D#3 Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga Anlg M

E 5 64 E 3 Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga L Conga Anlg L

F 5 65 F 3 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

F#566F#3 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

G 5 67 G 3 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

G#568G#3 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L

A 5 69 A 3 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa

A#570A#3 Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas Maracas 2

B5 71 B3

SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH

C6 72 C4

SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL

C#673C#4 Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short

D6 74 D4

Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long

D#675D#4 Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves Claves 2

E 6 76 E 4 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

F 6 77 F 4 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

F#678F#4 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Scratch H 2 Scratch H 2

G 6 79 G 4 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open Scratch L 2 Scratch L 3

G#680G#4 2 TriangleMute TriangleMute TriangleMute TriangleMute TriangleMute TriangleMute

A 6 81 A 4 2 TriangleOpen TriangleOpen TriangleOpen TriangleOpen TriangleOpen TriangleOpen

A#682A#4 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

B 6 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

C 7 84 C 5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree

– 85 C#5

– 86 D 5

– 87 D#5

– 88 E 5

– 89 F 5

– 90 F#5

– 91 G 5

• Key Off: Keys marked “

” stop sounding the instant they are released.

• Alternate Assign: Playing any instrument within a numbered group will imme-

diately stop the sound of any other instrument in the same group of the same

number.

Bank Select MSB 127 127 127 127 126 126

Bank Select LSB 0 0 0 0 0 0

Program # (1-128) 28 33 41 49 1 2

Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Symphony Kit SFX Kit 1 SFX Kit 2

Note Note # Note off assign

C#113C#-1 3 Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute Surdo Mute

D 1 14 D -1 3 Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open Surdo Open

D#115D#-1 Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q Hi Q

E 1 16 E -1 Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap Whip Slap

F 1 17 F -1 4 Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H Scratch H

F#118F#-1 4 Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L Scratch L

G 1 19 G -1 Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap Finger Snap

G#120G#-1 Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise Click Noise

A 1 21 A -1 Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click Mtrnm Click

A#122A#-1 Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell Mtrnm Bell

B 1 23 B -1 Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L Seq Click L

C 2 24 C 0 Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H Seq Click H

C#225C#0 Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap Brush Tap

D2 26 D0

Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl Brush Swirl

D#227D#0 Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap Brush Slap

E2 28 E0

ReversCymbal BrushTapSwrl BrushTapSwrl BrushTapSwrl

F2 29 F0

Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll Snare Roll

F#230F#0 Hi Q 2 Castanet Castanet Castanet

G 2 31 G 0 SnareTechno3 Snare Soft Brush Slap 2 Brush Slap 2

G#232G#0 Sticks Sticks Sticks Sticks

A 2 33 A 0 KickTechno Q Kick Soft Kick Soft Kick Soft 2

A#234A#0 Rim Gate OpenRimShot OpenRimShot OpenRimShot

B 2 35 B 0 KickTechno L Kick Tight Kick Tight Gran Cassa

C 3 36 C 1 KickTechno 2 Kick Jazz Kick Small GranCassa Mu CuttingNoiz Phone Call

C#337C#1 SideStickAn Side Stick Side Stick Side Stick CuttingNoiz2 Door Squeak

D 3 38 D 1 Snare Clap Snare Brush Slap 3 Band Snare DstCuttingNz Door Slam

D#339D#1 Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap Hand Clap String Slap Scratch Cut

E 3 40 E 1 Snare Dry 2 Snare Tight Brush Tap 2 Band Snare 2 Bass Slide Scratch H 3

F 3 41 F 1 Tom Analog 1 Tom Jazz 1 Tom Brush 1 Tom Jazz 1 Pick Scrape Wind Chime

F#342F#1 1 HiHatClose 3 Hi-HatClosed Hi-HatClosed Hi-HatClosed Telephone 2

G 3 43 G 1 Tom Analog 2 Tom Jazz 2 Tom Brush 2 Tom Jazz 2

G#344G#1 1 HatCloseAn 2 Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal Hi-Hat Pedal

A 3 45 A 1 Tom Analog 3 Tom Jazz 3 Tom Brush 3 Tom Jazz 3

A#346A#1 1 HiHat Open 3 Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open Hi-Hat Open

B 3 47 B 1 Tom Analog 4 Tom Jazz 4 Tom Brush 4 Tom Jazz 4

C 4 48 C 2 Tom Analog 5 Tom Jazz 5 Tom Brush 5 Tom Jazz 5

C#449C#2 Crash Analog CrashCymbal1 CrashCymbal1 Hand Cymbal

D 4 50 D 2 Tom Analog 6 Tom Jazz 6 Tom Brush 6 Tom Jazz 6

D#451D#2 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1 RideCymbal 1 HandCymShort

E 4 52 E 2 Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Chinese Cym Fl.Key Click Ignition

F 4 53 F 2 Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Ride Cym Cup Squeal

F#454F#2 Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Tambourine Exhaust

G 4 55 G 2 SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal SplashCymbal Crash

G#456G#2 Cowbell Anlg Cowbell Cowbell Cowbell Siren

A 4 57 A 2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 CrashCymbal2 HandCymbal 2 Train

A#458A#2 Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Vibraslap Jet Plane

B 4 59 B 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2 RideCymbal 2 HandCym2Shrt Starship

C 5 60 C 3 Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Bongo H Burst

C#561C#3 Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Bongo L Coaster

D 5 62 D 3 Conga Anlg H Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Conga H Mute Submarine

D#563D#3 Conga Anlg M Conga H Open Conga H Open Conga H Open

E 5 64 E 3 Conga Anlg L Conga L Conga L Conga L

F 5 65 F 3 Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H Timbale H

F#566F#3 Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L Timbale L

G 5 67 G 3 Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H Agogo H

G#568G#3 Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Agogo L Shower Laugh

A 5 69 A 3 Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Cabasa Thunder Scream

A#570A#3 Maracas 2 Maracas Maracas Maracas Wind Punch

B5 71 B3

SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH SambaWhistlH Stream Heartbeat

C6 72 C4

SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL SambaWhistlL Bubble Footsteps

C#673C#4 Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Guiro Short Feed Applause 2

D6 74 D4

Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long Guiro Long

D#675D#4 Claves 2 Claves Claves Claves

E 6 76 E 4 Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H Wood Block H

F 6 77 F 4 Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L Wood Block L

F#678F#4 Scratch H 2 Cuica Mute Cuica Mute Cuica Mute

G 6 79 G 4 Scratch L 3 Cuica Open Cuica Open Cuica Open

G#680G#4 2 TriangleMute TriangleMute TriangleMute TriangleMute

A 6 81 A 4 2 TriangleOpen TriangleOpen TriangleOpen TriangleOpen

A#682A#4 Shaker Shaker Shaker Shaker

B 6 83 B 4 Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells Jingle Bells

C 7 84 C 5 Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Bell Tree Dog Machine Gun

– 85 C#5Horse Laser Gun

– 86 D 5 Bird Tweet 2 Explosion

– 87 D#5 Kitty Firework

– 88 E 5 Growl

– 89 F 5 Haunted

– 90 F#5 Ghost

– 91 G 5 Maou

Drum/key Assignment List

Style List

POP 8Beat Pop 1

8Beat Pop 2

8Beat Standard

8Beat Medium

8Beat Ballad

Piano Ballad

Pop Ballad 1

Pop Ballad 2

Organ Ballad

New Age

16BEAT 16Beat Pop

16Beat Shuffle 1

16Beat Shuffle 2

16Beat Ballad 1

16Beat Ballad 2

16Beat Ballad 3

Fusion

Fusion Ballad

Funk 1

Funk 2

DANCE POP Dance Pop 1

Dance Pop 2

Techno

Eurobeat

Synth Boogie

70s Disco

Tropical

Party Pop

Jungle

ROCK US Rock

16Beat Rock

8Beat Uptempo

Rock Shuffle

Pop Shuffle

Rhythm & Blues

Soul

Gospel Shuffle

Rock & Roll

Twist

BALLAD Slow Rock 1

Slow Rock 2

6/8 Ballad

Jazz Ballad

Orchestral Jazz Ballad

Rock Ballad

Soul Ballad

6/8 Gospel

Blues

Enka

JAZZ Swing

Big Band Swing

Big Band Ballad

Jazz Quartet

Cool Jazz

Dixieland

Boogie

Bebop

Jazz Rock

BALLROOM Foxtrot

Jive

Big Band Quickstep

Cha Cha

Rhumba

Tango Continental

Mambo

Beguine

LATIN POP Bossa Nova 1

Bossa Nova 2

Bossa Nova 3

Salsa

Samba

Jazz Samba

Reggae

Pop Reggae

TRADITIONAL March 1

March 2

6/8 March

Polka

Ragtime

Showtune

Showtime

COUNTRY Bluegrass 1

Bluegrass 2

Country Rock

Country Shuffle

8Beat Country

Light Pop

Folkrock

Country Ballad

Cowboy Boogie

Country 2Step

WALTZ Standard Waltz

Traditional Waltz

Pop Waltz

Jazz Waltz

Big Band Waltz

Viennese Waltz

Musette Waltz

Country T. Waltz

Country Waltz

Category Style Name Category Style Name

Piano Ballad

Swing1

March

Arpeggio1

Samba

Rock & Roll

80’s Pop

6/8 March

Pop Ballad

Petit Waltz

Jazz Ballad

Swing2

Ragtime1

Arpeggio2

Bossa Nova

Honky Tonk

Tight Rock

Ragtime2

Rock Piano

Jazz Waltz

16beatBallad

2beat

Musical

Arpeggio3

Rhumba

BoogieWoogie

Dance Pop

Fanfare

Arpeggio4

Minuet

Rocca Ballad

Old Jazz

Galop

Like Harp

Beguine

16beat Rock

8beat

Cha Cha

Like Swan

Birthday

● Pianist Style List /

One Touch Registration Registration

Group Parameters Basic Setting Setting Parameters All Backup Group Recall Group

Parameters (Freeze Parameters) Setup (*1)

VOICE First voice name *2 Grand Piano

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Octave Shift of first voice 0

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Voice selected on each group First voice of a voice group

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

DUAL Dual ON/OFF OFF — —

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Second voice name Strings Slow 1

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Octave Shift of second voice 0

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Detune Depth 5

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Dual Volume Balance Equal level

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

SPLIT Split ON/OFF OFF

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Left range voice name Acous.Bass 1

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Octave Shift of left range voice 0

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Split Volume Balance Equal level

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

Split Point F#2 — VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

ORGAN Six types of Organ settings. Initial data — — — VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

COMBINATION

REVERB Reverb ON/OFF Differs depending on the voice

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Reverb Type Differs depending on the style

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Reverb Total Depth 50

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Reverb Part Depth

(BASS, CHORD, RHYTHM, KBD, MIC.)

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

EFFECT Effect ON/OFF Differs depending on the voice

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Effect Type Differs depending on the voice

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Effect Depth (R1,R2, L) Differs depending on the voice

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Effect Depth (MIC.) 0

REVERB/EFFECT

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

MASTER EQUALIZER

Equalizer Type FLAT

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

POWER BASS Power Bass ON/OFF OFF — —

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

(CVP-98 only) Power Bass Volume 6 — —

VOICE SETTING VOICES ETTING

REGISTRATION Regist Freeze ON/OFF OFF — — — REGISTRATION REGISTRATION

Freeze Parameters ON/OFF (VOICE SETTING, OFF — — — REGISTRATION REGISTRATION

REVERB/EFFECT, TUNE, PEDAL)

Freeze Parameters ON/OFF (ACMP SETTING) ON — — — REGISTRATION REGISTRATION

Memorized Parameters of all 20 Registrations Initial data — — — REGISTRATION REGISTRATION

Registration Name REGIST A-1 — E-4 — — — REGISTRATION REGISTRATION

MIXER Mixer Part Volume 90

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

(BASS, CHORD, PAD, PHRASE, RHYTHM)

Mixer Part Volume (HARMONY) 90

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Mixer Part Volume (KBD) 100

VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

STYLE Style Name 8 Beat Pop 1

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Style selected on each group First style of a style group — —

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

MAIN A/B setting MAIN A

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING —

Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF OFF

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Auto Accompaniment type MULTI FINGER — ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

SMALL ACMP ON/OFF OFF

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Virtual Arranger ON/OFF ON

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Harmony ON/OFF OFF

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Harmony type Trio

ACMP SETTING

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

METRONOME Metronome type NORMAL — —

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

Metronome volume 50 — —

ACMP SETTING ACMP SETTING

SONG Guide mode NORMAL — —

SONG SETTING SONG SETTING

Guide Repeat number 3 — —

SONG SETTING SONG SETTING

Piano Roll display AUTO — —

SONG SETTING SONG SETTING

Lyric Display ON/OFF ON — —

SONG SETTING SONG SETTING

HELP Help language ENGLISH — — —

Always set to BACKUP

—

FUNCTION Tune 440.0 Hz — —

TUNE TUNE

Transpose 0 — VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

Effect setting AUTO — —

REVERB/EFFECT REVERB/EFFECT

Key Touch NORMAL — VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

Volume when [FIXED] is selected 76 — VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

Pan (LEFT, RIGHT1, RIGHT2) settings CENTER — VOICE SETTING

VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

Left pedal setting SOFT — PEDAL

PEDAL PEDAL

Damper range R — PEDAL

PEDAL PEDAL

Damper mode CONT. — PEDAL

PEDAL PEDAL

Soundboard depth (CVP-98 only) 50 — —

VOICE SETTING VOICE SETTING

Transmission channel of left range voice 3 — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Transmission channel of first voice 1 — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Transmission channel of second voice 2 — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Local Control ON/OFF ON — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Sync. setting INT. — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Program receive/send ON/OFF Tx&Rx — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Control receive/send ON/OFF Tx&Rx — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

System Exclusive receive/send ON/OFF Tx&Rx — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Start/Stop receive/send ON/OFF Tx&Rx — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

MIDI transpose receive ON/OFF ON — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Auto Accompaniment and rhythm send ON/OFF OFF — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Harmony send ON/OFF OFF — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Remote Keyboard OFF — —

MIDI SETTING MIDI SETTING

Micro Tuning ON/OFF OFF — —

TUNE TUNE

Micro Tuning parameter settings 0 — —

TUNE TUNE

Scale Tuning setting PRESET — TUNE

TUNE TUNE

Preset Scale setting EQUAL — TUNE

TUNE TUNE

Basic key of Preset Scale C — TUNE

TUNE TUNE

User Scale parameter setting 0 — TUNE

TUNE TUNE

Backup parameter ON/OFF settings Differs depending on Always set to

each parameter (*3) BACKUP

Pop-up Time (VOICE/STYLE) 15 — —

UTILITY UTILITY

Pop-up Time (OTHERS) 8 — —

UTILITY UTILITY

Alert Voice STEEL DRUMS — —

UTILITY UTILITY

Alert Volume 50 — —

UTILITY UTILITY

*1 These are the [ALL SETUP] parameters in the FUNCTION [REGISTRATION] page (display page 7).

*2 When an Organ Combination voice is selected, the edited settings are also included.

*3 REGISTRATION, UTILITY are set to ON, and others are set to OFF.

Parameter Chart

Fingering Chart

* All fingerings shown are simple root-position types.

Example for “C” chords

( )

(

11)

Cadd

9(9)

( )

(9)

(

Caug

(

( )

Cm Cm

(

( )

(9)

CmM

Cmadd

( )

(11)

( )

(

CmM

Cdim

( )

CmM

7(9) 77

C sus

( )

(9)

11)

( )

(

( )

(13)

(

( )

(

13)

Csus

(

( )

CVP-98 CVP-96

KEYBOARD 88 keys (A–1 — C7)

TONE GENERATOR AWM (Advanced Wave Memory)

MAXIMUM SIMULTANEOUS 128 64

POLYPHONY

VOICES Clavinova voices: 133 ; XG voices: 480 ; Drum Kits: 12 sets

Voice Groups: Piano, Electric Piano, Vibraphone, Guitar, Clavinova Tone/Synth, Organ, Strings/Choir, Brass, Sax/Flute,

Bass, Drums, XG

Organ Combination, Dual/Split

EFFECTS Effect (25 types), Reverb (16 types)

TONE CONTROLS Master Equalizer, Power Bass (CVP-98 only)

ACCOMPANIMENT STYLES Accompaniment Styles: 100; Pianist Styles: 40

Style Groups: Pop, 16 Beat, Dance Pop, Rock, Ballad, Jazz, Ballroom, Latin Pop, Traditional, Country, Waltz

Disk/Custom

Pianist

Controls: Start/Stop, Syncro, Tap, Intro, Main A, Main B, Auto-fill, Ending, Fade in/out buttons

Metronome, Tempo –/+ buttons

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT Single Finger, Multi Finger, Fingered, Full Keybaord

Harmony, Pianist, One Touch Setting, Virtual Arranger, Synchro Stop, Small ACMP, Chord Assist, Individual Part Volume

Control (Mixer)

REGISTRATION Bank A - E x 4 memory locations (20), Freeze

SONG PLAY MODE Song Playback, Repeat, Volume control of individual Parts (Mixer)

Controls: Song, Play/Stop, Rewind, Fast forward, Pause

Guide Control: Easy Play, Next Note, Sound Repeat

Lyric Disply

SONG RECORD MODE Quick Recording, Track Recording, Chord Sequence, Song Name, Track Edit, Initial Edit

LCD/CONTROLS 320 x 240 dot liquid crystal display, Contrast dial, Beat lamp, Function button, Mixer button, Page < > buttons, Display

hold button, LCD buttons, data dial, –/+ buttons, Exit button

VOLUME CONTROLS Master volume, ACMP/Song volume

DEMO/HELP 27 Demo Songs; 5 help languages (English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish)

DISK DRIVE 3.5-inch micro floppy disk drive

PEDAL RIGHT Damper

CONTROLS CENTER Sostenuto

LEFT Soft, Start/Stop, Harmony On/Off, Registration+, Main A, Main B, Ending/Rit, Break, Fade In/Out

JACKS AND TERMINALS Headphone jacks x 2, AUX OUT jacks (L/L+R, R), AUX IN jacks (L/L+R, R), EXP.PEDAL jack, MIC. jack, TO HOST termi-

nal, MIDI terminals (IN, OUT, THRU)

INPUT/OUTPUT AUX OUT: Output Impedance: 600 Ω

SPECIFICATIONS AUX IN: Input Impedance: 10 kΩ; Input Sensitivity: –10 dBm

MAIN AMPLIFIERS 240 W (60 W x 4) 120 W (60 W x 2)

SPEAKERS 16 cm x 2, 14 cm x 2, 2.5 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2 16 cm x 2, 5 cm x 4

DIMENSIONS Music stand 1415 mm x 603 mm x 890 mm 1415 mm x 603 mm x 890 mm

(W x D x H) down (55-3/4" x 23-3/4" x 35") (55-3/4" x 23-3/4" x 35")

Music stand 1415 mm x 603 mm x 1055 mm 1415 mm x 603 mm x 1050 mm

up (55-3/4" x 23-3/4" x 41-1/2") (55-3/4" x 23-3/4" x 41-3/8")

WEIGHT 69.5 kg (153 lbs., 4 oz.) 66.0 kg (145 lbs., 8 oz.)

Specifications

• Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.

Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time

without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in

every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

• Phone jacks

• Cardboard packing cushions

• 5 x 18 mm screws x 30

• AC power cord

CVP-98/96: Assembly

• Be careful not to confuse parts, and be sure to install all parts in the

correct direction. Please assemble in accordance with the se-

quence given below.

• Assembly should be carried out by at least two persons.

• Be sure to use the correct screw size, as indicated above. Use of

incorrect screws can cause damage.

• Be sure to tighten up all screws upon completing assembly of each

unit.

• To disassemble, reverse the assembly sequence given below.

ZOpen the box and remove all the parts.

Take out the two cardboard packing cushions and place

them on the floor. Then take out main unit and place it on

top of the packing cushions. Position the cushions so as to

protect the phone jacks on the base of the unit.

Remove all parts from the box. Confirm that all parts

shown in the illustration above are provided.

• When you lift the pedal box assembly, make sure that you lift by

both legs.

• Blanket, etc.

• Three screws on each side

2 3

XCarefully lean the main unit against a wall.

To make it easier to install the legs, place a soft blanket or

similar material on the floor near a wall, close the

Clavinova keyboard cover, place the front panel of the

Clavinova (the side with the keyboard) on the blanket and

gently lean the unit against the wall — MAKING SURE

THAT IT CAN NOT FALL — as shown in the illustra-

tion.

• Do not lay the main unit upside-down on the floor.

CAttach the front legs.

Securely attach the two front legs using three screws for

each leg (use a Philips “+” screwdriver) as shown in the

illustration. Make sure that the screws are firmly tight-

ened.

VAttach the speaker box.

Remove the speaker box cover (attached to the speaker

box in 6 places with plastic plugs) from the speaker box.

Gently rest the speaker box onto the corresponding brack-

ets on the front legs. (Be careful not to touch the speakers

when handling the speaker box. Damage may result.)

Make sure the speaker cord is extending out from the rear

of the speaker box. Secure the speaker box to the main

keyboard unit using four screws on each side. Insert the

speaker cord connector into the corresponding socket on

the main keyboard unit, making sure that the protruding

clip on the connector is facing up.

• Four screws on each side

CVP-98

• Six screws on each side

BAttach the pedal box assembly.

Before attaching the rear leg and pedal box assembly,

insert the pedal cord plug extending from the rear leg into

the corresponding socket in the main unit. Make sure that

the protruding clip on the connector is facing up. Put the

excess cord into the leg and loosely secure the rear leg

and pedal assembly using 6 screws for each leg (four

screws per leg and two screws on each leg bracket). Once

the rear leg and pedal assembly has been loosely attached,

go back and tighten all 12 of the screws on the rear leg

and pedal assembly.

NSecure the speaker box.

Stand the main unit on its legs and securely attach the

speaker box to the bracket on the front legs using two

screws for each bracket. If it is impossible to align the

bracket holes with the speaker box holes, slightly loosen

the three screws on each of the front legs, align the holes,

and secure the speaker box. After the speaker box is

firmly attached, retighten the screws on the front legs

firmly. Put the speaker box cover back in place with the

rounded edge of the cover at the bottom, insert the plugs

on the cover into their corresponding holes on the speaker

box.

• When attaching the cover, make sure you push where the plugs

are. The speaker cover is made of a soft material so pushing in a

place where there are no plugs may cause damage to the speaker.

• Two screws on each side

• Make sure the plugs are fully inserted and there is no

space left around the plugs and holes.

CVP-98

• A voltage selector is provided in some areas.

7 8

127

220

240

110

MVoltage Selector

Before connecting the AC power cord, check the setting

of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas.

To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main

voltages, use a “minus” screwdriver to rotate the selector

dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears

next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set

at 240V when the unit is initially shipped.

After the proper voltage has been selected connect the AC

power cord.

<Set the adjuster.

For stability, an adjuster is provided on the bottom of the

pedal box. Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm con-

tact with the floor surface. The adjuster ensures stable

pedal operation and facilitates pedal effect control. If the

adjuster is not in firm contact with the floor surface, dis-

torted sound may result.

■After completing the assembly, please

check the following.

• Are there any parts left over?

➔Review the assembly procedure and correct any errors.

• Is the Clavinova clear of doors and other movable fixtures?

➔Move the Clavinova to an appropriate location.

• Does the Clavinova make a rattling noise when you shake it?

➔Tighten all screws.

• Does the pedal box rattle or give way when you step on the ped-

als?

➔Turn the adjuster so that it is set firmly against the floor.

• Are the pedal and power cords inserted securely into the sockets?

➔Check the connection.

• If the main unit creaks or is otherwise unsteady when you play on

the keyboard, refer to the assembly diagrams and retighten all

screws.

• When moving the instrument after assembly, always hold the

lower surface of the main unit, NEVER the top portion or key-

board cover. Improper handling can result in damage to the

instrument or personal injury.

Yamaha CVP98 Owner's Manual

[4.9MB] cvp96 Manual Library - Yamaha - United States

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation